11th Physics Chapter 3 Exercise Motion in a Plane Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 3

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Motion in a Plane Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 3 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 3 Exercise Solutions 

1. Choose the correct option.

Question 1.
An object thrown from a moving bus is on example of __________
(A) Uniform circular motion
(B) Rectilinear motion
(C) Projectile motion
(D) Motion in one dimension
Answer:
(C) Projectile motion

Question 2.
For a particle having a uniform circular motion, which of the following is constant ____________.
(A) Speed
(B) Acceleration
(C) Velocity
(D) Displacement
Answer:
(A) Speed

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
The bob of a conical pendulum undergoes ___________
(A) Rectilinear motion in horizontal plane
(B) Uniform motion in a horizontal circle
(C) Uniform motion in a vertical circle
(D) Rectilinear motion in vertical circle
Answer:
(B) Uniform motion in a horizontal circle

Question 4.
For uniform acceleration in rectilinear motion which of the following is not correct?
(A) Velocity-time graph is linear
(B) Acceleration is the slope of velocity time graph
(C) The area under the velocity-time graph equals displacement
(D) Velocity-time graph is nonlinear
Answer:
(D) Velocity-time graph is nonlinear

Question 5.
If three particles A, B and C are having velocities \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{A}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{B}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{C}\) which of the following formula gives the relative velocity of A with respect to B
(A) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{A}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{B}\)
(B) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{A}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{C}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{B}\)
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{A}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{B}\)
(D) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{C}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{A}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{A}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{B}\)

2. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Separate the following in groups of scalar and vectors: velocity, speed, displacement, work done, force, power, energy, acceleration, electric charge, angular velocity.
Answer:
Scalars
Speed, work done, power, energy, electric charge.

Vectors
Velocity, displacement, force, acceleration, angular velocity (pseudo vector).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 2.
Define average velocity and instantaneous velocity. When are they same?
Answer:
Average velocity:

  1. Average velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}\)) of an object is the displacement (\(\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}\)) of the object during the time interval (∆t) over which average velocity is being calculated, divided by that time interval.
  2. Average velocity = (\(\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time interval }}\))
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{av}}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}_{2}-\mathrm{t}_{1}}=\frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
  3. Average velocity is a vector quantity.
  4. Its SI unit is m/s and dimensions are [M0L1T-1]
  5. For example, if the positions of an object are x +4 m and x = +6 m at times t = O and t = 1 minute respectively, the magnitude of its average velocity during that time is Vav = (6 – 4)1(1 – 0) = 2 m per minute and its direction will be along the positive X-axis.
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}\) = 2 i m/min
    Where, i = unit vector along X-axis.

Instantaneous velocity:

  1. The instantaneous velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\)) is the limiting value of ¡he average velocity of the object over a small time interval (∆t) around t when the value of lime interval goes to zero.
  2. It is the velocity of an object at a given instant of time.
  3. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
    where \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) derivative of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}\) with respect to t.

In case of uniform rectilinear motion, i.e., when an object is moving with constant velocity along a straight line, the average and instantaneous velocity remain same.

Question 3.
Define free fall.
Answer:
The motion of any object under the influence of gravity alone is called as free fall.

Question 4.
If the motion of an object is described by x = f(t) write formulae for instantaneous velocity and acceleration.
Answer:

  1. Instantaneous velocity of an object is given as,
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
  2. Motion of the object is given as, x = f(t)
  3. The derivative f ‘(f) represents the rate of change of the position f (t) at time t, which is the instantaneous velocity of the object.
    ∴ \(\vec{v}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = f'(t)
  4. Acceleration is defined as the rate of change of velocity with respect to time.
  5. The second derivative of the position function f “(t) represents the rate of change of velocity i.e., acceleration.
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d}^{2} \mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{dt}^{2}}\) = f”(t)

Question 5.
Derive equations of motion for a particle moving in a plane and show that the motion can be resolved in two independent motions in mutually perpendicular directions.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object moving in an x-y plane. Let the initial velocity of the object be \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) at t = 0 and its velocity at time t be \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\).
  2. As the acceleration is constant, the average acceleration and the instantaneous acceleration will be equal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 6
    This is the first equation of motion in vector form.
  3. Let the displacement of the object from time t
    = 0 to t be \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\)
    For constant acceleration, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}}{2}\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 7
    This is the second equation of motion in vector form.
  4. Equations (1) and (2) can be resolved into their x and y components so as to get corresponding scalar equations as follows.
    vx = ux + axt ………….. (3)
    vy = uy + ay t …………… (4)
    sx = uxt + \(\frac{1}{2}\) axt2 ………….. (5)
    sy = uyt + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ayt2 ………..(6)
  5. It can be seen that equations (3) and (5) involve only the x components of displacement, velocity and acceleration while equations (4) and (6) involve only the y components of these quantities.
  6. Thus, the motion along the x direction of the object is completely controlled by the x components of velocity and acceleration while that along the y direction is completely controlled by the y components of these quantities.
  7. This shows that the two sets of equations are independent of each other and can be solved independently.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 6.
Derive equations of motion graphically for a particle having uniform acceleration, moving along a straight line.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 2

  1. Consider an object starting from position x = 0 at time t = 0. Let the velocity at time (t = 0) and t be u and v respectively.
  2. The slope of line PQ gives the acceleration. Thus
    ∴ a = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}-\mathrm{u}}{\mathrm{t}-0}=\frac{\mathrm{v}-\mathbf{u}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
    ∴ v = u + at …………… (1)
    This is the first equation of motion.
  3. The area under the curve in velocity-time graph gives the displacement of the object.
    ∴ s = area of the quadrilateral OPQS = area of rectangle OPRS + area of triangle PQR.
    = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (v – u) t
    But, from equation (1)
    at = v – u
    ∴ s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at2
    This is the second equation of motion,
  4. The velocity is increasing linearly with time as acceleration is constant. The displacement is given as,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 3
    ∴ s = (v2 – u2) / (2a)
    ∴ v2 – u2 = 2as
    This is the third equation of motion.

Question 7.
Derive the formula for the range and maximum height achieved by a projectile thrown from the origin with initial velocity \(\vec{u}\) at an angel θ to the horizontal.
Answer:
Expression for range:

  1. Consider a body projected with velocity \(\vec{u}\), at an angle θ of projection from point O in the co-ordinate system of the XY- plane, as shown in figure.
  2. The initial velocity \(\vec{u}\) can be resolved into two rectangular components:
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 9
    ux = u cos θ (Horizontal component)
    uy = u sin θ (Vertical component)
  3. The horizontal component remains constant throughout the motion due to the absence of any force acting in that direction, while the vertical component changes according to
    vy = uy + ayt
    with ay = -g and uy = u sinθ
  4. Thus, the components of velocity of the projectile at time t are given by,
    vx = ux = u cos θ
    vy = ux – gt = usin θ – gt
  5. Similarly, the components of displacements of the projectile in the horizontal and vertical directions at time t are given by,
    s = (u cosθ) t
    sy = (usinθ)t – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt2
  6. At the highest point, the time of ascent of the projectile is given as,
    tA = \(\frac{u \sin \theta}{g}\) …………..(2)
  7. The total time in air i.e., time of flight is given as, T = 2tA = \(\frac{2u \sin \theta}{g}\) …… (3)
  8. The total horizontal distance travelled by the particle in this time T is given as,
    R = ux ∙ T
    R = u cos θ ∙ (2tA)
    R = u cos θ ∙ \(\frac{2 \mathrm{u} \sin \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\) ……………[From (3)]
    R = \(\frac{u^{2}(2 \sin \theta \cdot \cos \theta)}{g}\)
    R = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\) ………..[∵ sin 2θ = 2sin∙cosθ]
    This is required expression for horizontal range of the projectile.

Expression for maximum height of a projectile:
The maximum height H reached by the projectile is the distance travelled along the vertical (y) direction in time tA.

Substituting sy = H and t = ta in equation (1),
we have,
H = (u sin θ)tA – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gtA2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 10
This equation represents maximum height of projectile.

Question 8.
Show that the path of a projectile is a parabola.
Answer:

  1. Consider a body projected with velocity initial velocity \(\vec{u}\) , at an angle θ of projection from point O in the co-ordinate system of the XY-plane. as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 8
  2. The initial velocity \(\vec{u}\) can be resolved into two rectangular components:
    ux = u cos θ (Horizontal component)
    uy = u sin θ (Vertical component)
  3. The horizontal component remains constant throughout the motion due to the absence of any force acting in that direction, while the vertical component changes according to,
    vy = uy + ay t
    with ay, = -g and uy = u sinθ
  4. Thus, the components of velocity of the projectile at time t are given by,
    vx = ux = u cosθ
    vy = uy – gt = u sinθ – gt
  5. Similarly, the components of displacements of the projectile in the horizontal and vertical directions at time t are given by,
    sx = (u cosθ)t …………..(1)
    sy = (u sinθ)t – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt2 ………………. (2)
  6. As the projectile starts from x = O, we can use
    sx = x and sy = y.
    Substituting sx = x in equation (1),
    x = (u cosθ) t
    ∴ t = \(\frac{\mathrm{X}}{(\mathrm{u} \cos \theta)}\) …………….. (3)
    Substituting, sy in equation (2),
    y = (u sinθ)t – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt2 …………… (4)
    Substituting equation (3) in equation (4), we have,
    y = u sin θ (\(\frac{\mathrm{X}}{(\mathrm{u} \cos \theta)}\)) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) (\(\frac{\mathrm{X}}{(\mathrm{u} \cos \theta)}\))2 g
    ∴ y = x (tan θ) – (\(\frac{g}{2 u^{2} \cos ^{2} \theta}\))x2 ………………. (5)
    Equation (5) represents the path of the projectile.
  7. If we put tan θ = A and g/2u2cos2θ = B then equation (5) can be written as y = Ax – Bx2 where A and B are constants. This is equation of parabola. Hence, path of projectile is a parabola.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
What is a conical pendulum? Show that its time period is given by 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l \cos \theta}{g}}\), where l is the length of the string, θ is the angle that the string makes with the vertical and g is the acceleration due to gravity.
Answer:
A simple pendulum, Ch i given such a motion that the bob describes a horizontal circle and the string making a constant angle with the vertical describes a cone, is called a conical pendulum.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 17

  1. Consider a bob of mass m tied to one end of a string of length ‘P and other end is fixed to rigid support.
  2. Let the bob be displaced from its mean position and whirled around a horizontal circle of radius ‘r’ with constant angular velocity ω, then the bob performs U.C.M.
  3. During the motion, string is inclined to the vertical at an angle θ as shown in the figure above.
  4. In the displaced position, there are two forces acting on the bob.
    • The weight mg acting vertically downwards.
    • The tension T acting upward along the string.
  5. The tension (T) acting in the string can be resolved into two components:
    • T cosθ acting vertically upwards.
    • T sinθ acting horizontally towards centre of the circle.
  6. Since, there is no net force, vertical component T cosθ balances the weight and horizontal component T sinθ provides the necessary centripetal force.
    ∴ T cos θ = mg ……………. (1)
    T sin θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = mrω2 ……….. (2)
  7. Dividing equation (2) by (1),
    tan θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{rg}}\) ……….. (3)
    Therefore, the angle made by the string with the vertical is θ = tan-1 (\(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{rg}}\))
  8. Since we know v = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{T}}\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 18
    where l is length of the pendulum and h is the vertical distance of the horizontal circle from the fixed point O.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 10.
Define angular velocity. Show that the centripetal force on a particle undergoing uniform circular motion is -mω2\(\vec{r}\).
Answer:
Angular velocity of a particle is the rate of change of angular displacement.

Expression for centripetal force on a particle undergoing uniform circular motion:
i) Suppose a particle is performing U.C.M in anticlockwise direction.
The co-ordinate axes are chosen as shown in the figure.
Let,
A = initial position of the particle which lies on positive X-axis
P = instantaneous position after time t
θ = angle made by radius vector
ω = constant angular speed
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) = instantaneous position vector at time t

ii) From the figure,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}=\hat{\mathrm{i}} \mathrm{x}+\hat{\mathrm{j}} \mathrm{y}\)
where, \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) are unit vectors along X-axis and Y-axis respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 15
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 16
Negative sign shows that direction of acceleration is opposite to the direction of position vector. Equation (3) is the centripetal acceleration.
vii) Magnitude of centripetal acceleration is given by a = ω2r

viii) The force providing this acceleration should also be along the same direction, hence centripetal.
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = m\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) = -mω2\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\)
This is the expression for the centripetal force on a particle undergoing uniform circular motion.

ix) Magnitude of F = mω2r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = mωv

[Note: The definition of angular velocity is not mentioned in this chapter but is in Ch.2 Mathematical Methods.]

3. Solve the following problems.

Question 1.
An aeroplane has a run of 500 m to take off from the runway. It starts from rest and moves with constant acceleration to cover the runway in 30 sec. What is the velocity of the aeroplane at the take off ?
Answer:
Given: Length of runway (s) = 500 m, t = 30 s
To find: Velocity (y)
Formulae. i) s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at2
ii) v = u + at
Calculation: As the plane was initially at rest, u = 0
From formula (1),
500 = 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × a × (30)2
∴ 500 = 450 a
∴ a = \(\frac{10}{9}\) m/s2
From formula (ii),
v = 0 + \(\frac{10}{9}\) × 30
∴ v = \(\frac{100}{3}\) m/s = (\(\frac{100}{3} \times \frac{18}{5}\)) km/hr
∴ v = 120 km/hr
The velocity of the aeroplane at the take off is 120 km/hr.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 2.
A car moving along a straight road with a speed of 120 km/hr, is brought to rest by applying brakes. The car covers a distance of 100 m before it stops. Calculate
(i) the average retardation of the car
(ii) time taken by the car to come to rest.
Answer:
Given: u = 120 kmh-1 = 120 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = \(\frac{100}{3}\) ms-1
s = 100 m, v = 0
To find: i) Average retardation of the car (a)
ii) Time taken by car (t)

Formulae: i) v2 – u2 = 2as
ii) v = u + at
Calculation: From formula (i),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 5

i) Average retardation of the car is \(\frac{50}{9}\) ms2 (in magnitude).
ii) Time taken by the car to come to rest is 6 s.

Question 3.
A car travels at a speed of 50 km/hr for 30 minutes, at 30 km/hr for next 15 minutes and then 70 km/hr for next 45 minutes. What is the average speed of the car?
Answer:
Given: v1 = 50 km/hr. t1 = 30 minutes = 0.5 hr,
v2 = 30 km/hr, t2 = 15 minutes = 0.25 hr,
v3 = 70 km/hr, t3 = 45 minutes 0.75 hr
To find: Average speed of car (vav)
Formula vav = \(\frac{\text { total path length }}{\text { total time interval }}\)
Calculation:
Path length,
x1 = v1 × t1 = 50 × 0.5 = 25km
x2 = v2 × t2 = 30 × 0.25 = 7.5 km
x3 = v3 × t3 = 70 × 0.75 = 52.5 km
From formula,
vav = \(\frac{x_{1}+x_{2}+x_{3}}{t_{1}+t_{2}+t_{3}}\)
∴ vav = \(\frac{25+7.5+52.5}{0.5+0.25+0.75}=\frac{85}{1.5}\)
∴ vav = 56.66 km/hr

Question 4.
A velocity-time graph is shown in the adjoining figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 1
Determine:

  1. initial speed of the car
  2. maximum speed attained by the car
  3. part of the graph showing zero acceleration
  4. part of the graph showing constant retardation
  5. distance travelled by the car in first 6 sec.

Answer:

  1. Initial speed is at origin i.e. 0 m/s.
  2. Maximum speed attained by car, vmax = speed from A to B = 20 m/s.
  3. The part of the graph which shows zero acceleration is between t = 3 s and t = 6 s i.e., AB. This is because, during AB there is no change in velocity.
  4. The graph shows constant retardation from t = 6 s to t = 8 s i.e., BC.
  5. Distance travelled by car in first 6 s
    = Area of OABDO
    = A(△OAE) + A(rect. ABDE)
    = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 3 × 20 + 3 × 20
    = 30 + 60
    ∴ Distance travelled by car in first 6 s = 90 m

Question 5.
A man throws a ball to maximum horizontal distance of 80 meters. Calculate the maximum height reached.
Answer:
Given: R = 80m
To find: Maximum height reached (Hmax)
Formula: Rmax = 4Hmax
Calculation: From formula,
∴ Hmax = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{\max }}{4}=\frac{80}{4}\) = 20 m
The maximum height reached by the ball is 20m.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 6.
A particle is projected with speed v0 at angle θ to the horizontal on an inclined surface making an angle Φ (Φ < θ) to the horizontal. Find the range of the projectile along the inclined surface.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 12
i) The equation of trajectory of projectile is given by,
y(tan θ)x – (\(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2 \mathrm{u}^{2} \cos ^{2} \theta}\))x2 …………..(1)

ii) In this case to find R substitute,
y = R sinΦ ………….. (2)
x = R cosΦ ………….. (3)

iii) From equations (1), (2) and (3),
we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 13

Question 7.
A metro train runs from station A to B to C. It takes 4 minutes in travelling from station A to station B. The train halts at station B for 20 s. Then it starts from station B and reaches station C in next 3 minutes. At the start, the train accelerates for 10 sec to reach the constant speed of 72 km/hr. The train moving at the constant speed is brought to rest in 10 sec. at next station.
(i) Plot the velocity- time graph for the train travelling from the station A to B to C.
(ii) Calculate the distance between the stations A, B and C.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 4
The metro train travels from station A to station B in 4 minutes = 240 s.
The trains halts at station B for 20 s.
The train travels from station B’ to station C in 3 minutes= 180 s.
∴ Total time taken by the metro train in travelling from station A to B to C
= 240 + 20 + 180 = 440 s.
At start, the train accelerates for 10 seconds to reach a constant speed of 72 km/hr = 20 m/s.
The train moving is brought to rest in 10 s at next station.
The velocity-time graph for the train travelling from station A to B to C is as follows:
Distance travelled by the train from station A to station B
= Area of PQRS
= A ( △PQQ’) A (☐QRR’) + A(SRR’)
= (\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10 × 20 + (220 × 20) + (\(\frac{1}{2}\) 10 × 20)
= 100 + 4400 + 100
= 4600m = 4.6km

Distance travelled by the train from station B’ to station C
= Area of EFGD
= A(△EFF’) + A(☐F’FGG’) + A(△DGG’)
= (\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10 × 20) × (160 × 20) + (\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10 × 20)
= 100 + 3200 + 100
= 3400m = 3.4km

Question 8.
A train is moving eastward at 10 m/sec. A waiter is walking eastward at 1.2m/sec; and a fly is flying toward the north across the waiter’s tray at 2 m/s. What is the velocity of the fly relative to Earth.
Answer:
Given
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 11

Question 9.
A car moves in a circle at the constant speed of 50 m/s and completes one revolution in 40 s. Determine the magnitude of acceleration of the car.
Answer:
Given: v = 50 m/s, t = 40 s, s = 2πr
To find: acceleration (a)
Formulae: i) v = \(\frac{\mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
ii) a = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Calculation: From formula (i),
50 = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{40}\)
∴ r = \(\frac{50 \times 40}{2 \pi}\)
∴ r = \(\frac{1000}{\pi}\) cm
From formula (ii),
a = \(\frac{v^{2}}{r}=\frac{50^{2}}{1000 / \pi}\)
∴ a = \(\frac{5 \pi}{2}\) = 7.85 m/s2
The magnitude of acceleration of the car is 7.85 m/s.

Alternate method:
Given: v = 50 m/s, t = 40 s,
To find: acceleration (a)
Formula: a = rω2 = vω
Calculation: From formula,
a = vω
= v(\(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{t}}\))
= 50(\(\frac{2 \times 3.142}{40}\))
= \(\frac{5}{2}\) × 3.142
∴ a = 7.85m/s2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 10.
A particle moves in a circle with constant speed of 15 m/s. The radius of the circle is 2 m. Determine the centripetal acceleration of the particle.
Answer:
Given: v = 15 m/s, r = 2m
To find: Centripetal acceleration (a)
Formula: a = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
a = \(\frac{(15)^{2}}{2}=\frac{225}{2}\)
∴ a = 112.5m/s2
The centripetal acceleration of the particle is 112.5 m/s2.

Question 11.
A projectile is thrown at an angle of 30° to the horizontal. What should be the range of initial velocity (u) so that its range will be between 40m and 50 m? Assume g = 10 m s-2.
Answer:
Given: 40 ≤ R ≤ 50, θ = 300, g = 10 m/s2
To find: Range of initial velocity (u)
Formula: R = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin (2 \theta)}{\mathrm{g}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
The range of initial velocity,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 14
∴ 21.49m/s ≤ u ≤ 24.03m/s
The range of initial velocity should be between 21.49 m/s ≤ u ≤ 24.03 m/s.

11th Physics Digest Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall? (Textbook Page No. 30)

Question 1.
What ¡s meant by motion?
Answer:
The change ¡n the position of an object with respect to its surroundings is called motion.

Question 2.
What Is rectilinear motion?
Answer:
Motion in which an object travels along a straight line is called rectilinear motion.

Question 3.
What is the difference between displacement and distance travelled?
Answer:

  • Displacement is the shortest distance between the initial and final points of movement.
  • Distance is the actual path followed by a body between the points in which it moves.

Question 4.
What is the difference between uniform and non-uniform motion?
Answer:

  • A body is said to have uniform motion if it covers equal distances in equal intervals of time.
  • A body is said to have non-uniform motion if it covers unequal distances in equal intervals of time.

Internet my friend (Textbook Page No. 44)

i. hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.eduJhbase/mot.html#motcon
ii. www .college-physics.comlbook/mechanics
[Students are expected to visit the above mentioned webs ires and collect more information.]

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers:

11th Physics Chapter 4 Exercise Laws of Motion Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 4

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Laws of Motion Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 4 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 4 Exercise Solutions 

1. Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Consider following pair of forces of equal magnitude and opposite directions:
(P) Gravitational forces exerted on each other by two point masses separated by a distance.
(Q) Couple of forces used to rotate a water tap.
(R) Gravitational force and normal force experienced by an object kept on a table.
For which of these pair/pairs the two forces do NOT cancel each other’s translational
effect?
(A) Only P
(B) Only P and Q
(C) Only R
(D) Only Q and R
Answer:
(A) Only P

Question 2.
Consider following forces: (w) Force due to tension along a string, (x) Normal force given by a surface, (y) Force due to air resistance and (z) Buoyant force or upthrust given by a fluid.
Which of these are electromagnetic forces?
(A) Only w, y and z
(B) Only w, x and y
(C) Only x, y and z
(D) All four.
Answer:
(D) All four.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 3.
At a given instant three point masses m, 2m and 3m are equidistant from each other. Consider only the gravitational forces between them. Select correct statement/s for this instance only:
(A) Mass m experiences maximum force.
(B) Mass 2m experiences maximum force.
(C) Mass 3m experiences maximum force.
(D) All masses experience force of same magnitude.
Answer:
(C) Mass 3m experiences maximum force.

Question 4.
The rough surface of a horizontal table offers a definite maximum opposing force to initiate the motion of a block along the table, which is proportional to the resultant normal force given by the table. Forces F1 and F2 act at the same angle θ with the horizontal and both are just initiating the sliding motion of the block along the table. Force F1 is a pulling force while the force F2 is a pushing force. F2 > F1, because
(A) Component of F2 adds up to weight to increase the normal reaction.
(B) Component of F1 adds up to weight to increase the normal reaction.
(C) Component of F2 adds up to the opposing force.
(D) Component of F1 adds up to the opposing force.
Answer:
(A) Component of F2 adds up to weight to increase the normal reaction.

Question 5.
A mass 2m moving with some speed is directly approaching another mass m moving with double speed. After some time, they collide with coefficient of restitution 0.5. Ratio of their respective speeds after collision is
(A) 2/3
(B) 3/2
(C) 2
(D) ½
Answer:
(B) 3/2

Question 6.
A uniform rod of mass 2m is held horizontal by two sturdy, practically inextensible vertical strings tied at its ends. A boy of mass 3m hangs himself at one third length of the rod. Ratio of the tension in the string close to the boy to that in the other string is
(A) 2
(B) 1.5
(C) 4/3
(D) 5/3
Answer:
(B) 1.5

Question 7.
Select WRONG statement about centre of mass:
(A) Centre of mass of a ‘C’ shaped uniform rod can never be a point on that rod.
(B) If the line of action of a force passes through the centre of mass, the moment of that force is zero.
(C) Centre of mass of our Earth is not at its geometrical centre.
(D) While balancing an object on a pivot, the line of action of the gravitational force of the earth passes through the centre of mass of the object.
Answer:
(D) While balancing an object on a pivot, the line of action of the gravitational force of the earth passes through the centre of mass of the object.

Question 8.
For which of the following objects will the centre of mass NOT be at their geometrical centre?
(I) An egg
(II) a cylindrical box full of rice
(III) a cubical box containing assorted sweets
(A) Only (I)
(B) Only (I) and (II)
(C) Only (III)
(D) All, (I), (II) and (III).
Answer:
(D) All, (I), (II) and (III).

2. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
In the following table, every entry on the left column can match with any number of entries on the right side. Pick up all those and write respectively against A, B, C and D.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 1
Answer:

  1. Force due to tension in string: Electromagnetic (EM) force, reaction force, non-conservative force.
  2. Normal force: Electromagnetic (EM) force, non-conservative force. Reaction force
  3. Frictional force: Electromagnetic (EM) force, reaction force, non-conservative force.
  4. Resistive force offered by air or water for objects moving through it: Electromagnetic (EM) force, non-conservative force.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
In real life objects, never travel with uniform velocity, even on a horizontal surface, unless something is done? Why
is it so? What is to be done?
Answer:

  1. According to Newton’s first law, for a body to achieve uniform velocity, the net force acting on it should be zero.
  2. In real life, a body in motion is constantly being acted upon by resistive or opposing force like friction, in the direction opposite to that of the motion.
  3. To overcome these opposing forces, an additional external force is required. Thus, the net force is not maintained at zero, making it hard to achieve uniform velocity.

Question 3.
For the study of any kind of motion, we never use Newton’s first law of motion directly. Why should it be studied?
Answer:

  1. Newton’s first law shows an equivalence between the ‘state of rest’ and ‘state of uniform motion along a straight line.’
  2. Newton’s first law of motion defines force as a physical quantity that brings about a change in ‘state of rest’ or ‘state of .uniform motion along a straight line’ of a body.
  3. Newton’s first law of motion defines inertia as a fundamental property of every physical object by which the object resists any change in its state of rest or of uniform motion along a straight line. Due to all these reasons, Newton’s first law should be studied.

Question 4.
Are there any situations in which we cannot apply Newton’s laws of motion? Is there any alternative for it?
Answer:

  1. Limitation: Newton’s laws of motion cannot be applied for objects moving in non-inertial (accelerated) frame of reference.
    Alternative solution: For non-inertial (accelerated) frame of reference, pseudo force needs to be considered along with all the other forces.
  2. Limitation: Newton’s laws of motion are applicable to point objects and rigid bodies. Alternative solution: Body needs to be approximated as a particle as the laws can be applied to individual particles in a rigid body and then summed up over the body.
  3. Limitation: Newton’s laws of motion cannot be applied for objects moving with speeds comparable to that of light.
    Alternative solution: Einstein’s special theory of relativity has to be used.
  4. Limitation: Newton’s laws of motion cannot be applied for studying the behaviour and interactions of objects having atomic or molecular sizes.
    Alternative solution: Quantum mechanics has to be used.

Question 5.
You are inside a closed capsule from where you are not able to see anything about the outside world. Suddenly you feel that you are pushed towards your right. Can you explain the possible cause (s)? Is it a feeling or a reality? Give at least one more situation like this.
Answer:

  1. In a capsule, if we suddenly feel a push towards the right it is because the capsule is in motion and taking a turn towards the left.
  2. The push towards the right is a feeling. In reality, when the capsule is beginning its turning motion towards the left, we continue in a straight line.
  3. This happens because we try to maintain our direction of motion while the capsule takes a turn towards the left.
  4. An external force is required to change our direction of motion. In accordance with one of the inferences from Newton’s first law of motion, in the absence of any external force, we continue to move in a straight line at constant speed and feel the sudden push in the direction opposite to the motion of the capsule.
  5. Example: While travelling by bus, when the bus takes a sudden turn we feel the push in the opposite direction.

Question 6.
Among the four fundamental forces, only one force governs your daily life almost entirely. Justify the statement by stating that force.
Answer:

  1. Electromagnetic force is the attractive and repulsive force between electrically charged particles.
  2. Since electromagnetic force is much stronger than the gravitational force, it dominates all the phenomena on atomic and molecular scales.
  3. Majority of the forces experienced in our daily life like friction, normal reaction, tension in strings, elastic forces, viscosity etc. are electromagnetic in nature.
  4. The structure of atoms and molecules, the dynamics of chemical reactions etc. are governed by electromagnetic forces.

Thus, out of the four fundamental forces, electromagnetic force governs our daily life almost entirely.

Question 7.
Find the odd man out:
(i) Force responsible for a string to become taut on stretching
(ii) Weight of an object
(iii) The force due to which we can hold an object in hand.
Answer:
Weight of an object.
Reason: Weight of an object (force due to gravity) is a non-contact force while force responsible for a string to become taut (tension force) and force due to which we can hold an object in hand (normal force) are contact forces.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 8.
You are sitting next to your friend on ground. Is there any gravitational force of attraction between you two? If so, why are you not coming together naturally? Is any force other than the gravitational force of the earth coming in picture?
Answer:

  1. Yes, there exists a gravitational force between me and my friend sitting beside each other.
  2. The gravitational force between any two objects is given by, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) Where,
    G = universal gravitational constant, m1 and m2 = mass of the two objects, r = distance between centres of the two objects
  3. Thus, me and my friend attract each other. But due to our small masses, we exert a force on each other, which is too small as compared to the gravitational force of the earth. Hence, me and my friend don’t move towards each other.
  4. Apart from gravitational force of the earth, there is the normal force and frictional force acting on both me and my friend.

In Chapter 5, you will study about force of gravitation in detail.

Question 9.
Distinguish between:
(A) Real and pseudo forces,
(B) Conservative and non-conservative forces,
(C) Contact and non-contact forces,
(D) Inertial and non-inertial frames of reference.
Answer:
(A) Real and pseudo forces,

No Real force Pseudo Force
i. A force which is produced due to interaction between the objects is called real force. A pseudo force is one which arises due to the acceleration of the observer’s frame of reference.
ii. Real forces obey Newton’s laws of motion. Pseudo forces do not obey Newton’s laws of motion.
iii. Real forces are one of the four fundamental forces. Pseudo forces are not among any of the four fundamental forces.
Example: The earth revolves around the sun in circular path due to gravitational force of attraction between the sun and the earth. Example: Bus is moving with an acceleration (a) on a straight road in forward direction, a person of mass ‘m’ experiences a backward pseudo force of magnitude ‘ma’.

(B) Conservative and non-conservative forces,

No Conservative Non-conservative forces
i. If work done by or against a force is independent’ of the actual path, the force is said to be a conservative force. If work done by or against a force is dependent of the actual path, the force is said to be a non- conservative force.
ii. During work done by a conservative force, the mechanical energy is conserved. During work done by a non­ conservative force, the mechanical energy may not be conserved.
iii. Work done is completely recoverable. Work done is not recoverable.
Example:
gravitational force, magnetic force etc.
Example:
Frictional force, air drag etc.

(C) Contact and non-contact forces,

No Contact forces Non-contact forces
i. The forces experienced by a body due to physical contact are called contact forces. The forces experienced by a body without any physical contact are called non-contact forces.
ii. Example: gravitational force, electrostatic force, magnetostatic force etc. Example: Frictional force, force exerted due to collision, normal reaction etc.

(D) Inertial and non-inertial frames of reference.

No. Inertial frame of reference Non-inertial frame of reference
i The body moves with a constant velocity (can be zero). The body moves with variable velocity.
ii. Newton’s laws are Newton’s laws are
iii. The body does not accelerate. The body undergoes acceleration.
iv. In this frame, force acting on a body is a real force. The acceleration of the frame gives rise to a pseudo force.
Example: A rocket in inter-galactic space (gravity free space between galaxies) with all its engine shut. Example: If a car just starts its motion from rest, then during the time of acceleration the car will be in a non- inertial frame of reference.

Question 10.
State the formula for calculating work done by a force. Are there any conditions or limitations in using it directly? If so, state those clearly. Is there any mathematical way out for it? Explain.
Answer:

  1. Suppose a constant force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) acting on a body produces a displacement \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}\) in the body along the positive X-direction. Then the work done by the force is given as,
    W = F.s cos θ
    Where θ is the angle between the applied force and displacement.
  2. If displacement is in the direction of the force applied, θ = 0°
    W = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\).\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\)

Conditions/limitations for application of work formula:

  1. The formula for work done is applicable only if both force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) and displacement \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\) are constant and finite i.e., it cannot be applied when the force is variable.
  2. The formula is not applicable in several real- life situations like lifting an object through several thousand kilometres since the gravitational force is not constant. It is not applicable to viscous forces like fluid resistance as they depend upon speed and thus are often not constant with time.
  3. The method of integration has to be applied to find the work done by a variable force.

Integral method to find work done by a variable force:

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 2

  1. Let the force vary non-linearly in magnitude between the points A and B as shown in figure (a).
  2. In order to calculate the total work done during the displacement from s1 to s2, we need to use integration. For integration, we need to divide the displacement into large numbers of infinitesimal (infinitely small) displacements.
  3. Let at P1, the magnitude of force be F = P1P1‘. Due to this force, the body displaces through infinitesimally small displacement ds, in the direction of force.
    It moves from P1 to P2.
    ∴ \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{P}_{2}}\)
  4. But direction of force and displacement are same, we have
    \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=\mathrm{P}_{1}{ }^{\prime} \mathrm{P}_{2}^{\prime}\)
  5. \(\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\) is so small that the force F is practically constant for the displacement. As the force is constant, the area of the strip \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\) is the work done dW for this displacement.
  6. Hence, small work done between P1 to P2 is dW and is given by
    dW = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\) = \(\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{P}_{1}^{\prime} \times \mathrm{P}_{1}^{\prime} \mathrm{P}_{2}^{\prime}\)
    = Area of the strip P1P2P2‘P1‘.
  7. The total work done can be found out by dividing the portion AB into small strips like P1P2P2‘P1‘ and taking sum of all the areas of the strips.
    ∴ W = \int_{s_{1}}^{s 2} \vec{F} \cdot d \vec{s}=\text { Area } A B B^{\prime} A^{\prime}\(\)
  8. Method of integration is applicable if the exact way of variation in \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\) is known and that function is integrable.
  9. The work done by the non-linear variable force is represented by the area under the portion of force-displacement graph.
  10. Similarly, in case of a linear variable force, the area under the curve from s1 to s2 (trapezium APQB) gives total work done W [figure (b)].
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 3

Question 11.
Justify the statement, “Work and energy are the two sides of a coin”.
Answer:

  1. Work and energy both are scalar quantities.
  2. Work and energy both have the same dimensions i.e., [M1L2T-2].
  3. Work and energy both have the same units i.e., SI unit: joule and CGS unit: erg.
  4. Energy refers to the total amount of work a body can do.
  5. A body capable of doing more work possesses more energy and vice versa.
  6. Work done on a body by a conservative force is equal to the change in its kinetic energy.

Thus, work and energy are the two sides of the same

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 12.
From the terrace of a building of height H, you dropped a ball of mass m. It reached the ground with speed v. Is the relation mgH = \(\frac{1}{2} m \mathrm{v}^{2}\) applicable exactly? If not, how can you account for the difference? Will the ball bounce to the same height from where it was dropped?
Answer:

  1. Let the ball dropped from the terrace of a building of height h have mass m. During free fall, the ball is acted upon by gravity (accelerating conservative force).
  2. While coming down, the work that is done is equal to the decrease in the potential energy.
  3. This work done however is not entirely converted into kinetic energy but some part of it is used in overcoming the air resistance (retarding non-conservative force). This part of energy appears in some other forms such as heat, sound, etc.
  4. Thus, in this case of an accelerating conservative force along with a retarding non-conservative force, the work-energy theorem is given as, Decrease in the gravitational
    P.E. = Increase in the kinetic energy + work done against non-conservative forces.
  5. Thus, the relation mgh = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}[latex] is not applicable when non-conservative forces are considered. The part of the energy converted to heat, sound etc also needs to be added to the equation,
  6. The ball will not bounce to the same height from where it was dropped due to the loss in kinetic energy during the collision making it an inelastic collision.

Question 13.
State the law of conservation of linear momentum. It is a consequence of which law? Given an example from our daily life for conservation of momentum. Does it hold good during burst of a cracker?
Answer:

  1. Statement: The total momentum of an isolated system is conserved during any interaction.
  2. The law of conservation of linear momentum is a consequence of Newton’s second law of motion, (in combination with Newton’s third law)
  3. Example: When a nail is driven into a wall by striking it with a hammer, the hammer is seen to rebound after striking the nail. This is because the hammer imparts a certain amount of momentum to the nail and the nail imparts an equal and opposite amount of momentum to the hammer.
    Linear momentum conservation during the burst of a cracker:

    • The law of conservation of linear momentum holds good during bursting of a cracker.
    • When a cracker is at rest before explosion, the linear momentum of the cracker is zero.
    • When cracker explodes into number of pieces, scattered in different directions, the vector sum of linear momentum of these pieces is also zero. This is as per the law of conservation of linear momentum.

Question 14.
Define coefficient of restitution and obtain its value for an elastic collision and a perfectly inelastic collision.
Answer:

i. For two colliding bodies, the negative of ratio of relative velocity of separation to relative velocity of approach is called the coefficient of restitution.

ii. Consider an head-on collision of two bodies of masses m1 and m2 with respective initial velocities u1 and u2. As the collision is head on, the colliding masses are along the same line before and after the collision. Relative velocity of approach is given as,
ua = u2 – u1
Let v1 and v2 be their respective velocities after the collision. The relative velocity of recede (or separation) is then vs = v2 – v1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 4
iii. For a head on elastic collision, According to the principle of conservation of linear momentum,
Total initial momentum = Total final momentum
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 5
iv. For a perfectly inelastic collision, the colliding bodies move jointly after the collision, i.e., v1 = v2
∴ v1 – v2 = 0
Substituting this in equation (1), e = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 15.
Discuss the following as special cases of elastic collisions and obtain their exact or approximate final velocities in terms
of their initial velocities.
(i) Colliding bodies are identical.
(ii) A very heavy object collides on a lighter object, initially at rest.
(iii) A very light object collides on a comparatively much massive object, initially at rest.
Answer:
The final velocities after a head-on elastic collision is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 6
i. Colliding bodies are identical
If m1 = m2, then v1 = u2 and v2 = u1
Thus, objects will exchange their velocities after head on elastic collision.

ii. A very heavy object collides with a lighter object, initially at rest.
Let m1 be the mass of the heavier body and m2 be the mass of the lighter body i.e., m1 >> m2; lighter particle is at rest i.e., u2 = 0 then,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 7
i.e., the heavier colliding body is left unaffected and the lighter body which is struck, travels with double the speed of the massive striking body.

iii. A very light object collides on a comparatively much massive object, initially at rest.
If m1 is mass of a light body and m2 is mass of heavy body i.e., m1 << m2 and u2 = 0. Thus, m1 can be neglected.
Hence v1 ≅ -u1, and v2 ≅ 0.
i.e., the tiny (lighter) object rebounds with same speed while the massive object is unaffected.

Question 16.
A bullet of mass m1 travelling with a velocity u strikes a stationary wooden block of mass m2 and gets embedded into it. Determine the expression for loss in the kinetic energy of the system. Is this violating the principle of conservation of energy? If not, how can you account for this loss?
Answer:

  1. A bullet of mass m1 travelling with a velocity u, striking a stationary wooden block of mass m2 and getting embedded into it is a case of perfectly inelastic collision.
  2. In a perfectly inelastic collision, although there is a loss in kinetic energy, the principle of conservation of energy is not violated as the total energy of the system is conserved.

Loss in the kinetic energy during a perfectly inelastic head on collision:

  1. Let two bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2 move with initial velocity [latex]\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{1}}\), and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{2}}\) respectively such that particle A collides head- on with particle B i.e., u1 > u2.
  2. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the particles stick together and move with a common velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{V}}\) after the collision along the same straight line.
    loss in kinetic energy = total initial kinetic energy – total final kinetic energy,
  3. By the law of conservation of momentum, m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2) v
    ∴ v = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{u}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \mathrm{u}_{2}}{\mathrm{~m}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2}}\)
  4. Loss of Kinetic energy,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 8
  5. Both the masses and the term (u1 – u2)2 are positive. Hence, there is always a loss in a perfectly inelastic collision. For a perfectly inelastic collision, as e = 0, the loss is maximum.

Question 17.
One of the effects of a force is to change the momentum. Define the quantity related to this and explain it for a variable
force. Usually when do we define it instead of using the force?
Answer:

  1. Impulse is the quantity related to change in momentum.
  2. Impulse is defined as the change of momentum of an object when the object is acted upon by a force for a given time interval.

Need to define impulse:

  1. In cases when time for which an appreciable force acting on an object is extremely small, it becomes difficult to measure the force and time independently.
  2. In such cases, however, the effect of the force i.e, the change in momentum due to the force is noticeable and can be measured.
  3. For such cases, it is convenient to define impulse itself as a physical quantity.
  4. Example: Hitting a ball with a bat, giving a kick to a foot-ball, hammering a nail, bouncing a ball from a hard surface, etc.

Impulse for a variable force:

  1. Consider the collision between a bat and ball. The variation of the force as a function of time is shown below. The force axis is starting from zero.
  2. From the graph, it can be seen that the force is zero before the impact. It rises to a maximum during the impact and decreases to zero after the impact.
  3. The shaded area or the area under the curve of the force -time graph gives the product of force against the corresponding time (∆t) which is the impulse of the force.
    Area of ABCDE = F. ∆t = impulse of force
  4. For a constant force, the area under the curve is a rectangle.
  5. In case of a softer tennis ball, the collision time becomes larger and the maximum force becomes less keeping the area under curve of the (F – t) graph same.
    Area of ABCDE = Area of PQRST

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 9
In chapter 3, you have studied the concept of using area under the curve.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 18.
While rotating an object or while opening a door or a water tap we apply a force or forces. Under which conditions is this process easy for us? Why? Define the vector quantity concerned. How does it differ for a single force and for two opposite forces with different lines of action?
Answer:

  1. Opening a door can be done with ease if the force applied is:
    • proportional to the mass of the object
    • far away from the axis of rotation and the direction of force is perpendicular to the line joining the axis of rotation with the point of application of force.
  2. This is because, the rotational ability of a force depends not only upon the magnitude and direction of force but also on the point where the force acts with respect to the axis of rotation.
  3. Rotating an object like a water tap can be done with ease if the two forces are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction are applied along different lines of action.
  4. The ability of a force to produce rotational motion is measured by its turning effect called ‘moment of force’ or ‘torque’.
  5. However, a moment of couple or rotational effect of a couple is also called torque.
  6. For differences in the two vector quantities.
No. Moment of a force Moment of a couple
i. Moment of a force is given as, \(\vec{\tau}=\vec{r} \times \vec{F}\) Moment of a couple is given as, \(\vec{\tau}=\vec{r}_{12} \times \vec{F}_{1}=\vec{r}_{21} \times \vec{F}_{2}\)
ii. It depends upon the axis of rotation and the point of application of the force. It depends only upon the two forces, i.e., it is independent of the axis of rotation or the points of application of forces.
iii. It can produce translational acceleration also, if the axis of rotation is not fixed or if friction is not enough. Does not produce any translational acceleration, but produces only rotational or angular acceleration.
iv. Its rotational effect can be balanced by a proper single force or by a proper couple. Its rotational effect can be balanced only by another couple of equal and opposite torque.

Question 19.
Why is the moment of a couple independent of the axis of rotation even if the axis is fixed?
Answer:

  1. Consider a rectangular sheet free to rotate only about a fixed axis of rotation, perpendicular to the plane.
  2. A couple of forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) and –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) is acting on the sheet at two different locations.
  3. Consider the torque of the couple as two torques due to individual forces causing rotation about the axis of rotation.
  4. Case 1: The axis of rotation is between the lines of action of the two forces constituting the couple. Let x and y be the perpendicular distances of the axis of rotation from the forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) and –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) respectively.
    In this case, the pair of forces cause anticlockwise rotation. As a result, the direction of individual torques due to the two forces is the same.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 10
  5. Case 2: Lines of action of both the forces are on the same side of the axis of rotation. Let q and p be the perpendicular distances of the axis of rotation from the forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) and –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)

Question 20.
Explain balancing or mechanical equilibrium. Linear velocity of a rotating fan as a whole is generally zero. Is it in
mechanical equilibrium? Justify your answer.
Answer:

  1. The state in which the momentum of a system is constant in the absence of an external unbalanced force is called mechanical equilibrium.
  2. A particle is said to be in mechanical equilibrium, if no net force is acting upon it.
  3. In case of a system of bodies to be in mechanical equilibrium, the net force acting on any part of the system should be zero i.e., the velocity or linear momentum of all parts of the system must be constant or zero. There should be no acceleration in any part of the system.
  4. Mathematically, for a system in mechanical equilibrium, \(\sum \vec{F}\) = 0.
  5. In case of rotating fan, if linear velocity is zero, then the linear momentum is zero. That means there is no net force acting on the fan. Hence, the fan is in mechanical equilibrium.

Question 21.
Why do we need to know the centre of mass of an object? For which objects, its position may differ from that of the centre of gravity?
Use g = 10 m s-2, unless, otherwise stated.
Answer:

  1. Centre of mass of an object allows us to apply Newton’s laws of motion to finite objects (objects of measurable size) by considering these objects as point objects.
  2. For objects in non-uniform gravitational field or whose size is comparable to that of the Earth (size at least few thousand km), the position of centre of mass will differ than that of centre of gravity.

3. Solve the following problems.

Question 1.
A truck of mass 5 ton is travelling on a horizontal road with 36 km hr-1 stops on travelling 1 km after its engine fails suddenly. What fraction of its weight is the frictional force exerted by the road? If we assume that the story repeats for a car of mass 1 ton i.e., can moving with same speed stops in similar distance same how much will the fraction be?
[Ans: \(\frac{1}{200}\) in the both]
Solution:
Given: mtruck = 5 ton = 5000 kg,
mcar = 1 ton = 1000 kg,
u = 36km/hr = 10 m/s,
v = 0 m/s, s = 1 km = 1000 m
To find: Ratio of force of friction to the weight of vehicle
Formulae:
i. v2 = u2 + 2as
ii. F = ma
Calculation: From formula (i),
2 × atruck × s = v2 – u2
∴ 2 × atruck × 1000 = 02 – 102
∴ 200atruck = -100
∴ atruck = -0.05 m/s2
Negative sign indicates that velocity is decreasing
From formula (ii),
Ftruck = mtruck × atruck = 5000 × 0.05
= 250 N
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 11
Answer:
The frictional force acting on both the truck and the car is \(\frac{1}{200}\) of their weight.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
A lighter object A and a heavier object B are initially at rest. Both are imparted the same linear momentum. Which will start with greater kinetic energy: A or B or both will start with the same energy?
[Ans: A]
Solution:

  1. Let m1 and m2 be the masses of light object A and heavy object B and v1 and v2 be their respective velocities.
  2. Since both are imparted with the same linear momentum,
    m1 v1 = m2 v2
  3. Kinetic energy of the lighter object A
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 12
  4. As m1 < m2, therefore K.E.A > K.E.B, i.e, the lighter body A has more kinetic energy.

Question 3.
As i was standing on a weighing machine inside a lift it recorded 50 kg wt. Suddenly for few seconds it recorded 45 kg wt. What must have happened during that time? Explain with complete numerical analysis. [Ans: Lift must be coming down with acceleration \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{10}\) = 1 ms-2]
Solution:
The weight recorded by weighing machine is always apparent weight and a measure of reaction force acting on the person. As the apparent weight (45 kg-wt) in this case is less than actual weight (50 kg-wt) the lift must be accelerated downwards during that time.

Numerical Analysis

  1. Weight on the weighing machine inside the lift is recorded as 50 kg-wt
    ∴ mg = 50 kg-wt
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 13
  2. This weight acts on the weighing machine which offers a reaction R given by the reading of the weighing machine
    ∴ R = 45kg-wt = \(\frac{9}{10}\)mg
  3. The forces acting on person inside lift are as follows:
    • Weight mg downward (exerted by the earth)
    • Normal reaction (R) upward (exerted by the floor)
  4. As, R < mg, the net force is in downward direction and given as,
    mg – R=ma
    But R = \(\frac{9}{10}\)mg.
    ∴ mg – \(\frac{9}{10}\)mg = ma
    ∴ \(\frac{mg}{10}\) = ma
    ∴ a = g/10
    ∴ a = 1 m/s2 (∵ g = 1 m/s2)
  5. Therefore, the elevator must be accelerated downwards with an acceleration of 1 m/s2 at that time.

Question 4.
Figure below shows a block of mass 35 kg resting on a table. The table is so rough that it offers a self adjusting resistive force 10% of the weight of the block for its sliding motion along the table. A 20 kg wt load is attached to the block and is passed over a pulley to hang freely on the left side. On the right side there is a 2 kg wt pan attached to the block and hung freely. Weights of 1 kg wt each, can be added to the pan. Minimum how many and maximum how many such weights can be added into the pan so that the block does not slide along the table? [Ans: Min 15, maximum 21].
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 14
Solution:
Frictional (resistive) force f = 10% (weight)
= \(\frac{10}{100}\) × 35 × 10 = 35N 100
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 15

i. Consider FBD for 20 kg-wt load. Initially, the block kept on the table is moving towards left, because of the movement of block of mass 20 kg in downward direction.
Thus, for block of mass 20 kg,
ma = mg – T1 …. (1)
Consider the forces acting on the block of mass 35 kg in horizontal direction only as shown in figure (b). Thus, the force equation for this block is, m1a = T1 – T2 – f ….(2)
To prevent the block from sliding across the table,
m1a = ma = 0
∴ T1 = mg = 200 N ….[From (1)]
T1 = T2 + f ….[From (2)]
∴ T2 + f = 200
∴ T2 = 200 – 35 = 165 N
Thus, the total force acting on the block from right hand side should be 165 N.
∴ Total mass = 16.5 kg
∴ Minimum weight to be added = 16.5 – 2 = 14.5 kg
≈ 15 weights of 1 kg each

ii. Now, considering motion of the block towards right, the force equations for the masses in the pan and the block of mass 35 kg can be determined from FBD shown
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 16
From figure (c)
m1a = T2 – T1 – f ….(iii)
From figure (d),
m2a = m2g – T2 … .(iv)
To prevent the block of mass 35 kg from sliding across the table, m1a = m2a = 0
From equations (iii) and (iv),
T2 = T1 + f
T2 = m2g
∴ m2g = 200 + 35 = 235 N
∴ The maximum mass required to stop the sliding = 23.5 – 2 = 21.5kg ≈ 21 weights of 1 kg
Answer:
The minimum 15 weights and maximum 21 weights of 1 kg each are required to stop the block from sliding.

Question 5.
Power is rate of doing work or the rate at which energy is supplied to the system. A constant force F is applied to a body
of mass m. Power delivered by the force at time t from the start is proportional to
(a) t
(b) t2
(c) \(\sqrt{t}\)
(d) t0
Derive the expression for power in terms of F, m and t.
[Ans: p = \(\frac{F^{2} t}{m}\), ∴ p ∝ t]
Solution:
Derivation for expression of power:

i. A constant force F is applied to a body of mass (m) initially at rest (u = 0).

ii. We have,
v = u + at
∴ v = 0 + at
∴ v = at …. (1)

iii. Now, power is the rate of doing work,
∴ P = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{t}}\)
∴ P = F. \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) [∵ dW = F. ds]

iv. But \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = v, the instantaneous velocity of the particle.
∴ P = F.V … (2)

v. According to Newton’s second law,
F = ma … (3)

vi. Substituting equations (1) and (3) in equation (2)
P = (ma) (at)
∴ P = ma2t
∴ P = \(\frac{m^{2} a^{2}}{m}\) × t
∴ P = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}^{2}}{\mathrm{~m}} \mathrm{t}\)

vii. As F and m are constant, therefore, P ∝ t.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 6.
40000 litre of oil of density 0.9 g cc is pumped from an oil tanker ship into a storage tank at 10 m higher level than the ship in half an hour. What should be the power of the pump? [Ans: 2 kW]
Solution:
h = 10 m, ρ = 0.9 g/cc = 900 kg/m3, g = 10 m/s2,
V = 40000 litre = 40000 × 103 × 10-6 m3
= 40 m3
T = 30 min = 1800 s
To find: Power(P)
Formula: P = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{h} \rho \mathrm{gV}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
P = \(\frac{10 \times 900 \times 10 \times 40}{1800}\)
∴ P = 2000 W
∴ P = 2 kW
Answer:
The power of the pump is 2 kW.

Question 7.
Ten identical masses (m each) are connected one below the other with 10 strings. Holding the topmost string, the system is accelerated upwards with acceleration g/2. What is the tension in the 6th string from the top (Topmost string being the first string)? [Ans: 6 mg]
Solution
Consider the 6th string from the top. The number of masses below the 6th string is 5. Thus, FBD for the 6th mass is given in figure (b).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 18
Answer:
Tension in the 6th string is 7.5 mg.
[Note: The answer given above is modified considering the correct textual concepts.]

Question 8.
Two galaxies of masses 9 billion solar mass and 4 billion solar mass are 5 million light years apart. If, the Sun has to cross the line joining them, without being attracted by either of them, through what point it should pass? [Ans: 3 million light years from the 9 billion solar mass]
Solution:
The Sun can cross the line joining the two galaxies without being attracted by either of them if it passes from a neutral point. Neutral point is a point on the line joining two objects where effect of gravitational forces acting due to both the objects is nullified.
Given that;
m1 = 9 × 109 Ms
m2 = 4 × 109 Ms
r = 5 × 106 light years
Let the neutral point be at distance x from mi. If sun is present at that point,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 19
Answer: The Sun has to cross the line from a point at a distance 3 million light years from the galaxy of mass 9 billion solar mass.

Question 9.
While decreasing linearly from 5 N to 3 N, a force displaces an object from 3 m to 5 m. Calculate the work done by this force during this displacement. [Ans: 8 N]
Solution:
For a variable force, work done is given by area under the curve of force v/s displacement graph. From given data, graph can be plotted as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 20
= 8 J
Ans: Work done is 8 J.
[Note: According to the definition of work done, S.J. unit of wõrk done is joule (J)]

Alternate solution:
Work done, w = Area of trapezium ADCB
∴ W = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(AD + CB) × DC
∴ W = 1 (5N + 3N) × (5m – 3m)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 8 × 2 = 8J

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 10.
Variation of a force in a certain region is given by F = 6x2 – 4x – 8. It displaces an object from x = 1 m to x = 2 m in this region. Calculate the amount of work
done. [Ans: Zero]
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 21
Answer:
The work done is zero.

Question 11.
A ball of mass 100 g dropped on the ground from 5 m bounces repeatedly. During every bounce 64% of the potential energy is converted into kinetic energy. Calculate the following:
(a) Coefficient of restitution.
(b) Speed with which the ball comes up from the ground after third bounce.
(c) Impulse given by the ball to the ground during this bounce.
(d) Average force exerted by the ground if this impact lasts for 250 ms.
(e) Average pressure exerted by the ball on the ground during this impact if contact area of the ball is 0.5 cm2.
[Ans: 0.8, 5.12 m/s, 1.152N s, 4.608 N, 9.216 × 104 N/m2]
Solution:
Given that, for every bounce, the 64% of initial energy is converted to final energy.
i. Coefficient of restitution in case of inelastic collision is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 105

ii. From equation (1),
∴ v = – eu
∴ After first bounce,
v1 = – eu
after second bounce,
v2 = -ev1 = -e(-eu)= e2u
and after third bounce,
v3 = – ev2 = – e(e2u) = – e3u
But u = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{gh}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 106

iii. Impulse given by the ball during third bounce, is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 110

iv. Average force exerted in 250 ms,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 120

v. Average pressure for area
0.5 cm2 = 0.5 × 10-4m2
P = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}=\frac{4.608}{0.5 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 9.216 × 104 N/m2

Question 12.
A spring ball of mass 0.5 kg is dropped from some height. On falling freely for 10 s, it explodes into two fragments of
mass ratio 1:2. The lighter fragment continues to travel downwards with speed of 60 m/s. Calculate the kinetic energy supplied during explosion. [Ans: 200 J]
Solution:
m1 + m2 = 0.5 kg, m1 : m2 = 1 : 2,
m1 = \(\frac{1}{6}\) kg,
∴ m2 = \(\frac{1}{3}\) kg
Initially, when the ball is falling freely for 10s,
v = u + at = 0 + 10(10)
∴ v = 100 m/s = u1 = u2
(m1 + m2)v = m1v1 + m2v2
∴ 0.5 × 100 = \(\frac{1}{6}\)(60) + \(\frac{1}{3}\)v2
∴ 50 = 10 + \(\frac{1}{3}\)v2
∴ 40 = \(\frac{1}{3}\)v2
∴ v2 = 120m/s
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 22
∴ K.E. = 200J.
Ans: Kinetic energy supplied is 200 J.

Question 13.
A marble of mass 2m travelling at 6 cm/s is directly followed by another marble of mass m with double speed. After collision, the heavier one travels with the average initial speed of the two. Calculate the coefficient of restitution. [Ans: 0.5]
Solution:
Given: m1 = 2m, m2 = m, u1 = 6 cm/s,
u2 = 2u1 = 12 cm/s,
v1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}_{1}+\mathrm{u}_{2}}{2}\) = 9cm/s
To find: Coefficient of restitution(e)
Formulae:

i. m1u1 +m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
ii. e = \(\frac{v_{2}-v_{1}}{u_{1}-u_{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula (i),
[(2m) × 6] + (m × 12) = (2m × 9) + mv2
∴ v2 = 6cm/s

From formula (ii),
e = \(\frac{6-9}{6-12}\) = \(\frac{-3}{-6}\) = 0.5

Answer: The coefficient of restitution is 0.5

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 14.
A 2 m long wooden plank of mass 20 kg is pivoted (supported from below) at 0.5 m from either end. A person of mass 40 kg starts walking from one of these pivots to the farther end. How far can the person walk before the plank topples? [Ans: 1.25 m]
Solution:
Let the person starts walking from pivot P2 as shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 100
Assume the person can walk up to distance x from P1 before the plank topples. The plank will topple when the moment exerted by the person about P1 is not balanced by a moment of force due to plank about P2.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 101
∴ For equilibrium,
40 × x = 20 × 0.5
∴ x = \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 0.25 m
Hence, the total distance walked by the person is 1.25 m.

Question 15.
A 2 m long ladder of mass 10 kg is kept against a wall such that its base is 1.2 m away from the wall. The wall is smooth but the ground is rough. Roughness of the ground is such that it offers a maximum horizontal resistive force (for sliding motion) half that of normal reaction at the point of contact. A monkey of mass 20 kg starts climbing the ladder. How far can it climb along the ladder? How much is the horizontal reaction at the wall? [Ans: 1.5 m, 15 N]
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 23
From the figure,
Given that, AC = length of ladder = 2 m
BC= 1.2m
From Pythagoras theorem,
AB = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{AC}^{2}-\mathrm{BC}^{2}}\) = 1.6 m … (i)
Also, ∆ABC ~ ∆DD’C
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{AB}}{\mathrm{DD}^{\prime}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{BC}}{\mathrm{D}^{\prime} \mathrm{C}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{AC}}{\mathrm{DC}}\)
∴ \(\frac{1.2}{\mathrm{D}^{\prime} \mathrm{C}}=\frac{2}{1}\)
∴ D’C = 0.6 m … (ii)

The ladder exerts horizontal force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{H}}\) on the wall at A and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) is the force exerted on the ground at C.
As |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)| = \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{H}}|=|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}|=\frac{\mathrm{N}}{2}\) … (iii)

Let monkey climb upto distance x along BC (Horizontal) i.e., CM’ = x .. . .(iv)
Then, the net normal reaction at point C will be, N = 100 + 200 = 300N
From equation (iii),
H = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{2}=\frac{300}{2}\) = 150N
By condition of equilibrium, taking moments about C,
(-H × AB) + (W1 × CD’) + (W2 × CM’) + (F × 0)’0
∴ (-150 × 1.6) + (100 × 0.6) + (200 × x) = 0
∴ 60 + 200x = 240
∴ 200x = 180
∴ x = 0.9

From figure, it can be shown that,
∆ABC ~ ∆MM’C
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{BC}}{\mathrm{CM}^{\prime}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{AC}}{\mathrm{CM}^{\prime}}\) ∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{1.2}}{\mathrm{0.9}^{\prime}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{2}}{\mathrm{CM}^{\prime}}\)
∴ CM = 1.5 m

Answer:

  1. The monkey can climb upto 1.5 m along the ladder.
  2. The horizontal reaction at wall is 150 N.

Question 16.
Four uniform solid cubes of edges 10 cm, 20 cm, 30 cm and 40 cm are kept on the ground, touching each other in order. Locate centre of mass of their system. [Ans: 65 cm, 17.7 cm]
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 24
The given cubes are arranged as shown in figure. Let one of the comers of smallest cube lie at the origin.
As the cubes are uniform, let their centre of masses lie at their respective centres.
rA \(\equiv\) (5, 5), rB \(\equiv\) (20, 10), rC \(\equiv\) = (45, 15) and rD \(\equiv\) – (80, 20)
Also, masses of the cubes are,
mA = \(l_{\mathrm{A}}^{3} \times \rho=10^{3} \rho\)
mB = (20)3ρ
mC = (30)3ρ
mD = (40)3ρ
As the cubes are uniform, p is same for all of them.
∴ For X – co-ordinate of centre of mass of the system,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 25
Similarly,
Y – co-ordinate of centre of mass of system is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 26
Answer: Centre of mass of the system is located at point (65 cm, 17.7 cm)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 17.
A uniform solid sphere of radius R has a hole of radius R/2 drilled inside it. One end of the hole is at the centre of the
sphere while the other is at the boundary. Locate centre of mass of the remaining sphere. [Ans: -R/14 ]
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 27
Let the centre of the sphere be origin O. Then, r1 be the position vector of centre of mass of uniform solid sphere and r2 be the position vector of centre of mass of the cut-out part of the sphere.
Now, mass of the sphere is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 28
∴ Position vector of centre of mass of remaining part,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 29
rCM = \(\frac{-\mathbf{R}}{14}\)
(Negative sign indicates the distance is on left side of the origin.)
Ans: Position of centre of mass of remaining sphere \(\frac{-\mathbf{R}}{14}\)

Question 18.
In the following table, every item on the left side can match with any number of items on the right hand side. Select all those.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 30
Answer:
i. Elastic collision: (b)
ii. Inelastic collision: (a), (c), (f), (e)
iii. Perfectly inelastic collision: (d)
iv. Head on collision: (c), (f)

11th Physics Digest Chapter 4 Laws of Motion Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall? (Textbook Page No. 47)

Question 1.
What are different types of motions?
Answer:
The various types of motion are linear, uniform linear, non-uniform linear, oscillatory, circular, periodic and random motion.

Question 2.
What do you mean by kinematical equations and what are they?
Answer:
A set of three equations which analyses rectilinear motion of uniformly accelerated body and helps to predict the position of body are called as kinematical equations.

  1. Equation for velocity-time relation: v = u + at
  2. Equation for position-time relation:
    s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at2
  3. Position-velocity relation: v2 = u2 + 2as

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 48)

Question 1.
Was Aristotle correct? If correct, explain his statement with an illustration.
Answer:
Aristotle was not correct in stating that an external force is required to keep a body in uniform motion.

Question 2.
If wrong, give the correct modified version of his statement.
Answer:
For an uninterrupted motion of a body, an additional external force is required for overcoming opposing/resistive forces.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 48)

Question 1.
What is then special about Newton’s first law if it is derivable from Newton’s second law?
Answer:

  1. Newton’s first law shows an equivalence between the ‘state of rest’ and ‘state of uniform motion along a straight line.’
  2. Newton’s first law of motion defines force as a physical quantity that brings about a change in ‘state of rest’ or ‘state of .uniform motion along a straight line’ of a body.
  3. Newton’s first law of motion defines inertia as a fundamental property of every physical object by which the object resists any change in its state of rest or of uniform motion along a straight line.
    Due to all these reasons, Newton’s first law should be studied.

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers:

11th Physics Chapter 9 Exercise Optics Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 9

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 9 Optics Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Optics Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 9 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 9 Exercise Solutions 

1. Multiple Choise Questions

Question 1.
As per recent understanding light consists of
(A) rays
(B) waves
(C) corpuscles
(D) photons obeying the rules of waves
Answer:
(D) photons obeying the rules of waves

Question 2.
Consider the optically denser lenses P, Q, R and S drawn below. According to Cartesian sign convention which of these have positive focal length?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 1
(A) OnlyP
(B) Only P and Q
(C) Only P and R
(D) Only Q and S
Answer:
(B) Only P and Q

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 3.
Two plane mirrors are inclined at angle 40° between them. Number of images seen of a tiny object kept between them is
(A) Only 8
(B) Only 9
(C) 8 or 9
(D) 9 or 10
Answer:
(C) 8 or 9

Question 4.
A concave mirror of curvature 40 cm, used for shaving purpose produces image of double size as that of the object. Object distance must be
(A) 10 cm only
(B) 20 cm only
(C) 30 cm only
(D) 10 cm or 30 cm
Answer:
(D) 10 cm or 30 cm

Question 5.
Which of the following aberrations will NOT occur for spherical mirrors?
(A) Chromatic aberration
(B) Coma
(C) Distortion
(D) Spherical aberration
Answer:
(A) Chromatic aberration

Question 6.
There are different fish, monkeys and water of the habitable planet of the star Proxima b. A fish swimming underwater feels that there is a monkey at 2.5 m on the top of a tree. The same monkey feels that the fish is 1.6 m below the water surface. Interestingly, height of the tree and the depth at which the fish is swimming are exactly same. Refractive index of that water must be
(A) 6/5
(B) 5/4
(C) 4/3
(D) 7/5
Answer:
(B) 5/4

Question 7.
Consider following phenomena/applications: P) Mirage, Q) rainbow, R) Optical fibre and S) glittering of a diamond. Total internal reflection is involved in
(A) Only R and S
(B) Only R
(C) Only P, R and S
(D) all the four
Answer:
(A) Only R and S

Question 8.
A student uses spectacles of number -2 for seeing distant objects. Commonly used lenses for her/his spectacles are
(A) bi-concave
(B) piano concave
(C) concavo-convex
(D) convexo-concave
Answer:
(A) bi-concave

Question 9.
A spherical marble, of refractive index 1.5 and curvature 1.5 cm, contains a tiny air bubble at its centre. Where will it appear when seen from outside?
(A) 1 cm inside
(B) at the centre
(C) 5/3 cm inside
(D) 2 cm inside
Answer:
(B) at the centre

Question 10.
Select the WRONG statement.
(A) Smaller angle of prism is recommended for greater angular dispersion.
(B) Right angled isosceles glass prism is commonly used for total internal reflection.
(C) Angle of deviation is practically constant for thin prisms.
(D) For emergent ray to be possible from the second refracting surface, certain minimum angle of incidence is necessary from the first surface.
Answer:
(A) Smaller angle of prism is recommended for greater angular dispersion.

Question 11.
Angles of deviation for extreme colours are given for different prisms. Select the one having maximum dispersive power of its material.
(A) 7°, 10°
(B) 8°, 11°
(C) 12°, 16°
(D) 10°, 14°
Answer:
(A) 7°, 10°

Question 12.
Which of the following is not involved in formation of a rainbow?
(A) refraction
(B) angular dispersion
(C) angular deviation
(D) total internal reflection
Answer:
(D) total internal reflection

Question 13.
Consider following statements regarding a simple microscope:
(P) It allows us to keep the object within the least distance of distinct vision.
(Q) Image appears to be biggest if the object is at the focus.
(R) It is simply a convex lens.
(A) Only (P) is correct
(B) Only (P) and (Q) are correct
(C) Only (Q) and (R) are correct
(D) Only (P) and (R) are correct
Answer:
(D) Only (P) and (R) are correct

2. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
As per recent development, what is the nature of light? Wave optics and particle nature of light are used to explain which phenomena of light respectively?
Answer:

  1. As per recent development, it is now an established fact that light possesses dual nature. Light consists of energy carrier photons. These photons follow the rules of electromagnetic waves.
  2. Wave optics explains the phenomena of light such as, interference, diffraction, polarisation, Doppler effect etc.
  3. Particle nature of light can be used to explain phenomena like photoelectric effect, emission of spectral lines, Compton effect etc.

Question 2.
Which phenomena can be satisfactorily explained using ray optics?
Answer:
Ray optics or geometrical optics: Ray optics can be used for understanding phenomena like reflection, refraction, double refraction, total internal reflection, etc.

Question 3.
What is focal power of a spherical mirror or a lens? What may be the reason for using P = \(\frac {1}{f}\) its expression?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 2

  1. Converging or diverging ability of a lens or of a mirror is defined as its focal power.
  2. This implies, more the power of any spherical mirror or a lens, the more is its ability to converge or diverge the light that passes through it.
  3. In case of convex lens or concave mirror, more the convergence, shorter is the focal length as shown in the figure.
  4. Similarly, in case of concave lens or convex mirror, more the divergence, shorter is the focal length.
  5. This explains that the focal power of any spherical lens or mirror is inversely proportional to the focal length.
  6. Hence, the expression of focal power is given by the formula, P = \(\frac {1}{f}\).

Question 4.
At which positions of the objects do spherical mirrors produce (i) diminished image (ii) magnified image?
Answer:
i. Amongst the two types of spherical mirrors, convex mirror always produces a diminished image at all positions of the object.

ii. Concave mirror produces diminished image when object is placed:

  • Beyond radius of curvature (i.e., u > 2f)
  • At infinity (i.e., u = ∞)

iii. Concave mirror produces magnified image when object is placed:

  • between centre of curvature and focus (i.e., 2f > u > f)
  • between focus and pole of the mirror (i.e., u < f)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 5.
State the restrictions for having images produced by spherical mirrors to be appreciably clear.
Answer:
i. In order to obtain clear images, the formulae for image formation by mirrors or lens follow the given assumptions:

  • Objects and images are situated close to the principal axis.
  • Rays diverging from the objects are confined to a cone of very small angle.
  • If there is a parallel beam of rays, it is paraxial, i.e., parallel and close to the principal axis.

ii. In case of spherical mirrors (excluding small aperture spherical mirrors), rays farther from the principle axis do not remain parallel to the principle axis. Thus, the third assumption is not followed and the focus gradually shifts towards the pole.

iii. The relation (f = \(\frac {R}{2}\)) giving a single point focus is not followed and the image does not get converged at a single point resulting into a distorted or defective image.

iv. This defect arises due to the spherical shape of the reflecting surface.

Question 6.
Explain spherical aberration for spherical mirrors. How can it be minimized? Can it be eliminated by some curved mirrors?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 3

  1. In case of spherical mirrors (excluding small aperture spherical mirror), The rays coming from a distant object farther from principal axis do not remain parallel to the axis. Thus, the focus gradually shifts towards the pole.
  2. The assumption for clear image formation namely, ‘If there is a parallel beam of rays, it is paraxial, i.e., parallel and close to the principal axis’, is not followed in this case.
  3. The relation f (f = \(\frac {R}{2}\)) giving a single point focus is not followed and the image does not get converged at a single point resulting into a distorted or defective image.
  4. This phenomenon is known as spherical aberration.
  5. It occurs due to spherical shape of the reflecting surface, hence known as spherical aberration.
  6. The rays near the edge of the mirror converge at focal point FM Whereas, the rays near the principal axis converge at point FP. The distance between FM and FP is measured as the longitudinal spherical aberration.
  7. In spherical aberration, single point image is not possible at any point on the screen and the image formed is always a circle.
  8. At a particular location of the screen (across AB in figure), the diameter of this circle is minimum. This is called the circle of least confusion. Radius of this circle is transverse spherical aberration.

Remedies for Spherical Aberration:

  1. Spherical aberration can be minimized by reducing the aperture of the mirror.
  2. Spherical aberration in curved mirrors can be completely eliminated by using a parabolic mirror.

Question 7.
Define absolute refractive index and relative refractive index. Explain in brief with an illustration for each.
Answer:
i. Absolute refractive index of a medium is defined as the ratio of speed of light in vacuum to that in the given medium.

ii. A stick or pencil kept obliquely in a glass containing water appears broken as its part in water appears to be raised.

iii. As the speed of light is different in two media, the rays of light coming from water undergo refraction at the boundary separating two media.

iv. Consider speed of light to be v in water and c in air. (Speed of light in air ~ speed of light in vacuum)
∴ refractive index of water = \(\frac {n_w}{n_s}\) = \(\frac {n_w}{n_{vacuum}}\) = \(\frac {c}{v}\)

v. Relative refractive index of a medium 2 is the refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1 and it is defined as the ratio of speed of light v1 in medium 1 to its speed v1 in medium 2.
∴ Relative refractive index of medium 2,
1n2 = \(\frac {v_1}{v_2}\)

vi. Consider a beaker filled with water of absolute refractive index n1 kept on a transparent glass slab of absolute refractive index n2.

vii. Thus, the refractive index of water with respect to that of glass will be,
nw2 = \(\frac {n_2}{n_1}\) = \(\frac {c/v_2}{c/v_1}\) = \(\frac {v_1}{v_2}\)

Question 8.
Explain ‘mirage’ as an illustration of refraction.
Answer:
i. On a hot clear Sunny day, along a level road, there appears a pond of water ahead of the road. Flowever, if we physically reach the spot, there is nothing but the dry road and water pond again appears some distance ahead. This illusion is called mirage.

ii. Mirage results from the refraction of light through a non-uniform medium.

iii. On a hot day the air in contact with the road is hottest and as we go up, it gets gradually cooler. The refractive index of air thus decreases with height. Hot air tends to be less optically dense than cooler air which results into a non-uniform medium.

iv. Light travels in a straight line through a uniform medium but refracts when traveling through a non-uniform medium.

v. Thus, the ray of light coming from the top of an object get refracted while travelling downwards into less optically dense air and become more and more horizontal as shown in Figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 4

vi. As it almost touches the road, it bends (refracts) upward. Then onwards, upward bending continues due to denser air.

vii. As a result, for an observer, it appears to be coming from below thereby giving an illusion of reflection from an (imaginary) water surface.

Question 9.
Under what conditions is total internal reflection possible? Explain it with a suitable example. Define critical angle of incidence and obtain an expression for it.
Answer:
Conditions for total internal reflection:
i. The light ray must travel from denser medium to rarer medium.

ii. The angle of incidence in the denser medium must be greater than critical angle for the given pair of media.

Total internal reflection in optical fibre:
iii. Consider an optical fibre made up of core of refractive index n1 and cladding of refractive index n2 such that, n1 > n2.

iv. When a ray of light is incident from a core (denser medium), the refracted ray is bent away from the normal.

v. At a particular angle of incidence ic in the denser medium, the corresponding angle of refraction in the rarer medium is 90°.

vi. For angles of incidence greater than ic, the angle of refraction become larger than 90° and the ray does not enter into rarer medium at all but is reflected totally into the denser medium as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 5

critical angle of incidence and obtain an expression:
i. Critical angle for a pair of refracting media can be defined as that angle of incidence in the denser medium for which the angle of refraction in the rarer medium is 90°.

ii. Let n be the relative refractive index of denser medium with respect to the rarer.

iii. Then, according to Snell’s law,
n = \(\frac {n_{denser}}{n_{rarer}}\) = \(\frac {sin r}{sin i_c}\) = \(\frac {sin 90°}{sin i_c}\)
∴ sin (ic) = \(\frac {1}{n}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 10.
Describe construction and working of an optical fibre. What are the advantages of optical fibre communication over electronic communication?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 6
Construction:

  1. An optical fibre consists of an extremely thin, transparent and flexible core surrounded by an optically rarer flexible cover called cladding.
  2. For protection, the whole system is coated by a buffer and a jacket.
  3. Entire thickness of the fibre is less than half a mm.
  4. Many such fibres can be packed together in an outer cover.

Working:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 7

  1. Working of optical fibre is based on the principle of total internal reflection.
  2. An optical signal (a ray of light) entering the core suffers multiple total internal reflections before emerging out after a several kilometres.
  3. The optical signal travels with the highest possible speed in the material.
  4. The emerged optical signal has extremely low loss in signal strength.

Advantages of optical fibre communication over electronic communication:

  1. Broad bandwidth (frequency range): For TV signals, a single optical fibre can carry over 90000 independent signals (channels).
  2. Immune to EM interference: Optical fibre being electrically non-conductive, does not pick up nearby EM signals.
  3. Low attenuation loss: loss being lower than 0.2 dB/km, a single long cable can be used for several kilometres.
  4. Electrical insulator: Optical fibres being electrical insulators, ground loops of metal wires or lightning do not cause any harm.
  5. Theft prevention: Optical fibres do not use copper or other expensive material which are prone to be robbed.
  6. Security of information: Internal damage is most unlikely to occur, keeping the information secure.

Question 11.
Why are prism binoculars preferred over traditional binoculars? Describe its working in brief.
Answer:

  1. Traditional binoculars use only two cylinders. Distance between the two cylinders can’t be greater than that between the two eyes. This creates a limitation of field of view.
  2. A prism binocular has two right angled glass prisms which apply the principle of total internal reflection.
  3. The incident light rays are reflected internally twice giving the viewer a wider field of view. For this reason, prism binoculars are preferred over traditional binoculars.

Working:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 8

  1. The prism binoculars consist of 4 isosceles, right angled prisms of material having critical angle less than 45°.
  2. The prism binoculars have a wider input range compared to traditional binoculars.
  3. The light rays incident on the prism binoculars, first get total internally reflected by the isosceles, right angled prisms 1 and 4.
  4. These reflected rays undergo another total internal reflection by prisms 2 and 3 to form the final image.

Question 12.
A spherical surface separates two transparent media. Derive an expression that relates object and image distances with the radius of curvature for a point object. Clearly state the assumptions, if any.
Answer:
i. Consider a spherical surface YPY’ of radius curvature R, separating two transparent media of refractive indices n1 and n2 respectively with ni1 < n2.

ii. P is the pole and X’PX is the principal axis. A point object O is at a distance u from the pole, in the medium of refractive index n1.

iii. In order to minimize spherical aberration, we consider two paraxial rays.

iv. The ray OP along the principal axis travels undeviated along PX. Another ray OA strikes the surface at A.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 9

v. As n1 < n2, the ray deviates towards the normal (CAN), travels along AZ and real image of point object O is formed at I.

vi. Let α, β and γ be the angles subtended by incident ray, normal and refracted ray with the principal axis.
∴ i = (α + β) and r = (β – γ)

vii. As, the rays are paraxial, all the angles can be considered to be very small.
i.e., sin i ≈ i and sin r ≈ r
Angles α, β and γ can also be expressed as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 10

viii. According to Snell’s law,
n1 sin (i) = n2 sin (r)
For small angles, Snell’s law can be written
as, n1i = n2r
∴ n1 (α + β) = n2 (β – γ)
∴ (n2 – n1)β = n1α + n2γ
Substituting values of α, β and γ, we get,
(n2 – n1) \(\frac {arc PA}{R}\) = n1(\(\frac {arc PA}{-u}\)) + n2(\(\frac {arc PA}{v}\))
∴ \(\frac {(n_2-n_1)}{R}\) = \(\frac {n_2}{v}\) – \(\frac {n_1}{u}\)

Assumptions: To derive an expression that relates object and image distances with the radius of curvature for a point object, the two rays considered are assumed to be paraxial thus making the angles subtended by incident ray, normal and refracted ray with the principal axis very small.

Question 13.
Derive lens makers’ equation. Why is it called so? Under which conditions focal length f and radii of curvature R are numerically equal for a lens?
Answer:
i. Consider a lens of radii of curvature Ri and R2 kept in a medium such that refractive index of material of the lens with respect to the medium is denoted as n.

ii. Assuming the lens to be thin, P is the common pole for both the surfaces. O is a point object on the principal axis at a distance u from P.

iii. The refracting surface facing the object is considered as first refracting surface with radii R1.

iv. In the absence of second refracting surface, the paraxial ray OA deviates towards normal and would intersect axis at I1. PI1 = V1 is the image distance for intermediate image I1.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 11
Before reaching I1, the incident rays (AB and OP) strike the second refracting surface. In this case, image I1 acts as a virtual object for second surface.

vii. For second refracting surface,
n2 = 1, n1 = n, R = R2, u = v1 and PI = v
∴ \(\frac{(1-\mathrm{n})}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{v}_{1}}-\frac{(\mathrm{n}-1)}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{v}_{1}}\) ………… (2)

viii. Adding equations (1) and (2),
(n – 1) \(\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)
For object at infinity, image is formed at focus, i.e., for u = ∞, v = f. Substituting this in above equation,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=(\mathrm{n}-1)\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{1}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}\right)\) …………. (3)
This equation in known as the lens makers’ formula.

ix. Since the equation can be used to calculate the radii of curvature for the lens, it is called the lens makers’ equation.

x. The numeric value of focal length f and radius of curvature R is same under following two conditions:
Case I:
For a thin, symmetric and double convex lens made of glass (n = 1.5), R1 is positive and R2 is negative but, |R1| = |R2|.
In this case,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=(1.5-1)\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}-\frac{1}{-\mathrm{R}}\right)=0.5\left(\frac{2}{\mathrm{R}}\right)=\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\)
∴ f = R

Case II:
Similarly, for a thin, symmetric and double concave lens made of glass (n = 1.5), R1 is negative and R2 is positive but, |R1| = |R2|.
In this case,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=(1.5-1)\left(\frac{1}{-\mathrm{R}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\right)=0.5\left(-\frac{2}{\mathrm{R}}\right)=-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\)
∴ f = -R or |f| = |R|

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

3. Answer the following questions in detail.

Question 1.
What are different types of dispersions of light? Why do they occur?
Answer:
i. There are two types of dispersions:
a. Angular dispersion
b. Lateral dispersion

ii. The refractive index of material depends on the frequency of incident light. Hence, for different colours, refractive index of material is different.

iii. For an obliquely incident ray, the angles of refraction are different for each colour and they separate as they travel along different directions resulting into angular dispersion.

iv. When a polychromatic beam of light is obliquely incident upon a plane parallel transparent slab, emergent beam consists of all component colours separated out.

v. In this case, these colours are parallel to each other and are also parallel to their initial direction resulting into lateral dispersion

Question 2
Define angular dispersion for a prism. Obtain its expression for a thin prism. Relate it with the refractive indices of the material of the prism for corresponding colours.
Answer:
i. If a polychromatic beam is incident upon a prism, the emergent beam consists of all the individual colours angularly separated. This phenomenon is known as angular dispersion for a prism.

ii. For any two component colours, angular dispersion is given by,
δ21 = δ2 – δ1

iii. For white light, we consider two extreme colours viz., red and violet.
∴ δVR = δV – δR

iv. For thin prism,
δ = A(n – 1)
δ21 = δ2 – δ1
= A(n2 – 1) – A(n1 – 1) = A(n2 – n1)
where n1 and n2 are refractive indices for the two colours.

v. For white light,
δVR = δV – δR
= A(nV – 1) – A(nR – 1) = A(nV – nR).

Question 3.
Explain and define dispersive power of a transparent material. Obtain its expressions in terms of angles of deviation and refractive indices.
Answer:
Ability of an optical material to disperse constituent colours is its dispersive power.

It is measured for any two colours as the ratio of angular dispersion to the mean deviation for those two colours. Thus, for the extreme colours of white light, dispersive power is given by,
\(\omega=\frac{\delta_{\mathrm{V}}-\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{\left(\frac{\delta_{\mathrm{V}}+\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{2}\right)} \approx \frac{\delta_{\mathrm{V}}-\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{\delta_{\mathrm{Y}}}=\frac{\mathrm{A}\left(\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{V}}-\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{R}}\right)}{\mathrm{A}\left(\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{Y}}-1\right)}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{V}}-\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{R}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{Y}}-1}\)

Question 4.
(i) State the conditions under which a rainbow can be seen.
Answer:
A rainbow can be observed when there is a light shower with relatively large raindrop occurring during morning or evening time with enough sunlight around.

(ii) Explain the formation of a primary rainbow. For which angular range with the horizontal is it visible?
Answer:
i. A ray AB incident from Sun (white light) strikes the upper portion of a water drop at an incident angle i.

ii. On entering into water, it deviates and disperses into constituent colours. The figure shows the extreme colours (violet and red).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 12

iii. Refracted rays BV and BR strike the opposite inner surface of water drop and suffer internal reflection.

iv. These reflected rays finally emerge from V’ and R’ and can be seen by an observer on the ground.

v. For the observer they appear to be coming from opposite side of the Sun.

vi. Minimum deviation rays of red and violet colour are inclined to the ground level at θR = 42.8° ≈ 43° and θV = 40.8 ≈ 41° respectively. As a result, in the rainbow, the red is above and violet is below.

(iii) Explain the formation of a secondary rainbow. For which angular range with the horizontal is it visible?
Answer:
i. A ray AB incident from Sun (white light) strikes the lower portion of a water drop at an incident angle i.

ii. On entering into water, it deviates and disperses into constituent colours. The figure shows the extreme colours (violet and red).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 13

iii. Refracted rays BV and BR finally emerge the drop from V’ and R’ after suffering two internal reflections and can be seen by an observer on the ground.

iv. Minimum deviation rays of red and violet colour are inclined to the ground level at θR ≈ 51° and θV ≈ 53° respectively. As a result, in the rainbow, the violet is above and red is below.

(iv) Is it possible to see primary and secondary rainbow simultaneously? Under what conditions?
Answer:
Yes, it is possible to see primary and secondary rainbows simultaneously. This can occur when the centres of both the rainbows coincide.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 5.
(i) Explain chromatic aberration for spherical lenses. State a method to minimize or eliminate it.
Answer:
Lenses are prepared by using a transparent material medium having different refractive index for different colours. Hence angular dispersion is present.
If the lens is thick, this will result into notably different foci corresponding to each colour for a polychromatic beam, like a white light. This defect is called chromatic aberration.
As violet light has maximum deviation, it is focussed closest to the pole.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 14
Reducing/eliminating chromatic aberration:

  1. Eliminating chromatic aberrations for all colours is impossible. Hence, it is minimised by eliminating aberrations for extreme colours.
  2. This is achieved by using either a convex and a concave lens in contact or two thin convex lenses with proper separation. Such a combination is called achromatic combination.

(ii) What is achromatism? Derive a condition to achieve achromatism for a lens combination. State the conditions for it to be converging.
Answer:
i. To eliminate chromatic aberrations for extreme colours from a lens, either a convex and a concave lens in contact or two thin convex lenses with proper separation are used.

ii. This combination is called achromatic combination. The process of using this combination is termed as achromatism of a lens.

iii. Let ω1 and ω2 be the dispersive powers of materials of the two component lenses used in contact for an achromatic combination.

iv. Let V, R and Y denote the focal lengths for violet, red and yellow colours respectively.

v. For lens 1, let
K1 = (\(\frac {1}{R_1}\)–\(\frac {1}{R_2}\))1 and K2 = (\(\frac {1}{R_1}\)–\(\frac {1}{R_2}\))2

vi. For the combination to be achromatic, the resultant focal length of the combination must be the same for both the colours,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 15
This is the condition for achromatism of a combination of lenses.

Condition for converging:
For this combination to be converging, fY must be positive.
Using equation (3), for fY to be positive, (fY)1 < (fY)2 ⇒ ω1 < ω2

Question 6.
Describe spherical aberration for spherical lenses. What are different ways to minimize or eliminate it?
Answer:
i. All the formulae used for image formation by lenses are based on some assumption. However, in reality these assumptions are not always true.

ii. A single point focus in case of lenses is possible only for small aperture spherical lenses and for paraxial rays.

iii. The rays coming from a distant object farther from principal axis no longer remain parallel to the axis. Thus, the focus gradually shifts towards pole.

iv. This defect arises due to spherical shape of the refracting surface, hence known as spherical aberration. It results into a blurred image with unclear boundaries.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 16

v. As shown in figure, the rays near the edge of the lens converge at focal point FM. Whereas, the rays near the principal axis converge at point FP. The distance between FM and FP is measured as the longitudinal spherical aberration.

vi. In absence of this aberration, a single point image can be obtained on a screen. In the presence of spherical aberration, the image is always a circle.

vii. At a particular location of the screen (across AB in figure), the diameter of this circle is minimum. This is called the circle of least confusion. Radius of this circle is transverse spherical aberration.

Methods to eliminate/reduce spherical aberration in lenses:
i. Cheapest method to reduce the spherical aberration is to use a planoconvex or planoconcave lens with curved side facing the incident rays.

ii. Certain ratio of radii of curvature for a given refractive index almost eliminates the spherical aberration. For n = 1.5, the ratio is
\(\frac {R_1}{R_2}\) = \(\frac {1}{6}\) and for n = 2, \(\frac {R_1}{R_2}\) = \(\frac {1}{5}\)

iii. Use of two thin converging lenses separated by distance equal to difference between their focal lengths with lens of larger focal length facing the incident rays considerably reduces spherical aberration.

iv. Spherical aberration of a convex lens is positive (for real image), while that of a concave lens is negative. Thus, a suitable combination of them can completely eliminate spherical aberration.

Question 7.
Define and describe magnifying power of an optical instrument. How does it differ from linear or lateral magnification?
Answer:
i. Angular magnification or magnifying power of an optical instrument is defined as the ratio of the visual angle made by the image formed by that optical instrument (β) to the visual angle subtended by the object when kept at the least distance of distinct vision (α).

ii. The linear magnification is the ratio of the size of the image to the size of the object.

iii. When the distances of the object and image formed are very large as compared to the focal lengths of the instruments used, the magnification becomes infinite. Whereas, the magnifying power being the ratio of angle subtended by the object and image, gives the finite value.

iv. For example, in case of a compound microscope,
Mmin = \(\frac {D}{f}\) = \(\frac {25}{5}\) = 5 and Mmax = 1 + \(\frac {D}{f}\) = 6
Hence image appears to be only 5 to 6 times bigger for a lens of focal length 5 cm.
For Mmin = \(\frac {D}{f}\) = 5, V = ∞
∴ Lateral magnification (m) = \(\frac {v}{u}\) = ∞
Thus, the image size is infinite times that of the object, but appears only 5 times bigger.

Question 8.
Derive an expression for magnifying power of a simple microscope. Obtain its minimum and maximum values in terms of its focal length.
Answer:
i. Figure (a) shows visual angle a made by an object, when kept at the least distance of distinct vision (D = 25 cm). Without an optical instrument this is the greatest possible visual angle as we cannot get the object closer than this.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 17

ii. Figure (b) shows a convex lens forming erect, virtual and magnified image of the same object, when placed within the focus.

iii. The visual angle p of the object and the image in this case are the same. However, this time the viewer is looking at the image which is not closer than D. Hence the same object is now at a distance smaller than D.

iv. Angular magnification or magnifying power, in this case, is given by
M = \(\frac {Visual angle of theimage}{Visual angle of the object at D}\) = \(\frac {β}{α}\)
For small angles,
M = \(\frac {β}{α}\) ≈ \(\frac {tan(β)}{tan(α)}\) = \(\frac {BA/PA}{BA/D}\) = \(\frac {D}{u}\)

v. For maximum magnifying power, the image should be at D. For thin lens, considering thin lens formula.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 18

Question 9.
Derive the expressions for the magnifying power and the length of a compound microscope using two convex lenses.
Answer:
i. The final image formed in compound microscope (A” B”) as shown in figure, makes a visual angle β at the eye.
Visual angle made by the object from distance D is α.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 19
From figure,
tan β = \(\frac {A”B”}{v_c}\) = \(\frac {A’B’}{u_c}\)
and tan α = \(\frac {AB}{D}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 10.
What is a terrestrial telescope and an astronomical telescope?
Answer:

  1. Telescopes used to see the objects on the Earth, like mountains, trees, players playing a match in a stadium, etc. are called terrestrial telescopes.
  2. In such case, the final image must be erect. Eye lens used for this purpose must be concave and such a telescope is popularly called a binocular.
  3. Most of the binoculars use three convex lenses with proper separation. The image formed by second lens is inverted with respect to object. The third lens again inverts this image and makes final image erect with respect to the object.
  4. An astronomical telescope is the telescope used to see the objects like planets, stars, galaxies, etc. In this case there is no necessity of erect image. Such telescopes use convex lens as eye lens.

Question 11.
Obtain the expressions for magnifying power and the length of an astronomical telescope under normal adjustments.
Answer:
i. For telescopes, a is the visual angle of the object from its own position, which is practically at infinity.

ii. Visual angle of the final image is p and its position can be adjusted to be at D. However, under normal adjustments, the final image is also at infinity making a greater visual angle than that of the object.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 20
iii. The parallax at the cross wires can be avoided by using the telescopes in normal adjustments.

iv. Objective of focal length f0 focusses the parallel incident beam at a distance f0 from the objective giving an inverted image AB.

v. For normal adjustment, the intermediate image AB forms at the focus of the eye lens. Rays refracted beyond the eye lens form a parallel beam inclined at an angle β with the principal axis.

vi. Angular magnification or magnifying power for telescope is given by,
M = \(\frac {β}{α}\) ≈ \(\frac {tan(β)}{tan(α)}\) = \(\frac {BA/P_cB}{BA/P_0B}\) = \(\frac {f_0}{f_e}\)

vii. Length of the telescope for normal adjustment is, L = f0 + fe.

Question 12.
What are the limitations in increasing the magnifying powers of (i) simple microscope (ii) compound microscope (iii) astronomical telescope?
Answer:
i. In case of simple microscope
\(\mathrm{M}_{\max }=\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{u}}=1+\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{f}}\)
Thus, the limitation in increasing the magnifying power is determined by the value of focal length and the closeness with which the lens can be held near the eye.

ii. In case of compound microscope,
M = \(\mathrm{m}_{0} \times \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{e}}=\frac{\mathrm{v}_{0}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{o}}} \times \frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{e}}}\)
Thus, in order to increase m0, we need to decrease u0. Thereby, the object comes closer and closer to the focus of the objective. This increases v0 and hence length of the microscope. Therefore, mQ can be increased only within the limitation of length of the microscope.

iii. In case of telescopes,
M = \(\frac {f_0}{f_e}\)
Where f0 = focal length of the objective
fe = focal length of the eye-piece
Length of the telescope for normal adjustment is, L = f0 + fe.
Thus, magnifying power of telescope can be increased only within the limitations of length of the telescope.

4. Solve the following numerical examples

Question 1.
A monochromatic ray of light strikes the water (n = 4/3) surface in a cylindrical vessel at angle of incidence 53°. Depth of water is 36 cm. After striking the water surface, how long will the light take to reach the bottom of the vessel? [Angles of the most popular Pythagorean triangle of sides in the ratio 3 : 4 : 5 are nearly 37°, 53° and 90°]
Answer:
From figure, ray PO = incident ray
ray OA = refracted ray
QOB = Normal to the water surface.
Given that,
∠POQ = angle of incidence (θ1) = 53°
Seg OB = 36 cm and nwater = \(\frac {4}{3}\)
From Snell’s law,
n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2
∴ nwater = \(\frac {sinθ_1}{sinθ_2}\)
Or sin θ2 = \(\frac {sinθ_1}{n_{water}}\) = \(\frac {sin(53°)×3}{4}\)
∴ θ2 ~ 37°
ΔOBA forms a Pythagorean triangle with angles 53°, 37° and 90°.
Thus, sides of ΔOBA will be in ratio 3 : 4 : 5 Such that OA forms the hypotenuse. From figure, we can infer that,
Seg OB = 4x = 36 cm
∴ x = 9
∴ seg OA = 5x = 45 cm and
seg AB = 3x = 27 cm.
This means the light has to travel 45 cm to reach the bottom of the vessel.
The speed of the light in water is given by,
v = \(\frac {c}{n}\)
∴ v = \(\frac {3×10^8}{4/3}\) = \(\frac {9}{4}\) × 108 m/s
∴ Time taken by light to reach the bottom of vessel is,
t = \(\frac {s}{v}\) = \(\frac {45×10^{-2}}{\frac {9}{4} × 10^8}\) = 20 × 10-10 = 2 ns or 0.002 µs

Question 2.
Estimate the number of images produced if a tiny object is kept in between two plane mirrors inclined at 35°, 36°, 40° and 45°.
Answer:
i. For θ1 =35°
n1 = \(\frac {360}{θ_1}\) = \(\frac {360}{35}\) = 10.28
As ni is non-integer, N1 = integral part of n1 = 10

ii. For θ2 = 36°
n2 = \(\frac {360}{36}\) = 10
As n2 is even integer, N2 = (n2 – 1) = 9

iii. For θ3 = 40°
n3 = \(\frac {360}{36}\) = 9
As n3 is odd integer.
Number of images seen (N3) = n3 – 1 = 8
(if the object is placed at the angle bisector) or Number of images seen (N3) = n3 = 9
(if the object is placed off the angle bisector)

iv. For θ4 = 45°
n4 = \(\frac {360}{45}\) = 8
As n4 is even integer,
N4 = n4 – 1 = 7

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 3.
A rectangular sheet of length 30 cm and breadth 3 cm is kept on the principal axis of a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm. Draw the image formed by the mirror on the same diagram, as far as possible on scale.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 21
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 22
[Note: The question has been modified and the ray digram is inserted in question in order to find the correct position of the image.]

Question 4.
A car uses a convex mirror of curvature 1.2 m as its rear-view mirror. A minibus of cross section 2.2 m × 2.2 m is 6.6 m away from the mirror. Estimate the image size.
Answer:
For a convex mirror,
f = +\(\frac {R}{2}\) = \(\frac {1.2}{2}\) = +0.6m
Given that, a minibus, approximately of a shape of square is at distance 6.6 m from mirror.
i.e., u = -6.6 m
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 23
∴ h2 = 0.183 m
i.e., h2 0.2 m

Question 5.
A glass slab of thickness 2.5 cm having refractive index 5/3 is kept on an ink spot. A transparent beaker of very thin bottom, containing water of refractive index 4/3 up to 8 cm, is kept on the glass block. Calculate apparent depth of the ink spot when seen from the outside air.
Answer:
When observed from the outside air, the light coming from ink spot gets refracted twice; once through glass and once through water.
∴ When observed from water,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 24
∴ Apparent depth = 2 cm
Now when observed from outside air, the total real depth of ink spot can be taken as (8 + 2) cm = 10 cm.
∴ \(\frac {n_w}{n_{air}}\) = \(\frac {Real depth}{Apparent depth}\)
∴ Apparent depth = \(\frac {10}{4/3}\)
= \(\frac {10×3}{4}\) = 7.5 cm

Question 64.
A convex lens held some distance above a 6 cm long pencil produces its image of SOME size. On shifting the lens by a distance equal to its focal length, it again produces the image of the SAME size as earlier. Determine the image size.
Answer:
For a convex lens, it is given that the image size remains unchanged after shifting the lens through distance equal to its focal length. From given conditions, it can be inferred that the object distance should be u = –\(\frac {f}{2}\)
Also, h1 = 6 cm, v1 = v2
From formula for thin lenses,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 25

Question 7.
Figure below shows the section ABCD of a transparent slab. There is a tiny green LED light source at the bottom left corner B. A certain ray of light from B suffers total internal reflection at nearest point P on the surface AD and strikes the surface CD at point Question Determine refractive index of the material of the slab and distance DQ. At Q, the ray PQ will suffer partial or total internal reflection?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 26
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 27

As, the light ray undergo total internal reflection at P, the ray BP may be incident at critical angle.
For a Pythagorean triangle with sides in ratio 3 : 4 : 5 the angle opposite to side 3 units is 37° and that opposite to 4 units is 53°.
Thus, from figure, we can say, in ΔBAP
∠ABP = 53°
∠BPN = ic = 53°
∴ nglass = \(\frac {1}{sin_c}\) = \(\frac {1}{sin(53°)}\) ≈ \(\frac {1}{0.8}\) = \(\frac {5}{4}\)
∴ Refractive index (n) of the slab is \(\frac {5}{4}\)
From symmetry, ∆PDQ is also a Pythagorean triangle with sides in ratio QD : PD : PQ = 3 : 4 : 5.
PD = 2 cm ⇒ QD = 1.5 cm.
As critical angle is ic = 53° and angle of incidence at Q, ∠PQN = 37° is less than critical angle, there will be partial internal reflection at Question

Question 8.
A point object is kept 10 cm away from a double convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and radii of curvature 10 cm and 8 cm. Determine location of the final image considering paraxial rays only.
Answer:
Given that, R1 = 10 cm, R2 = -8 cm,
u = -10 cm and n = 1.5
From lens maker’s equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 28

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 9.
A monochromatic ray of light is incident at 37° on an equilateral prism of refractive index 3/2. Determine angle of emergence and angle of deviation. If angle of prism is adjustable, what should its value be for emergent ray to be just possible for the same angle of incidence.
Answer:
By Snell’s law, in case of prism,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 29
For equilateral prism, A = 60°
Also, A= r1 + r2
∴ r2 = A – r1 = 60° – 23°39′ = 36°21′
Applying snell’s law on the second surface of
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 30
= sin-1 (0.889)
= 62°44′
≈ 63°
For any prism,
i + e = A + δ
∴ δ = (i + e) – A
= (37 + 63) – 60
= 40°
For an emergent ray to just emerge, the angle r’2 acts as a critical angle.
∴ r’2 = sin-1 (\(\frac {1}{n}\))
= sin-1 (\(\frac {2}{3}\))
= 41°48′
As, A = r’1 + r’2 and i to be kept the same.
⇒ A’ = r’1 + r’2
= 23°39′ + 41°48′
= 65°27’

Question 10.
From the given data set, determine angular dispersion by the prism and dispersive power of its material for extreme colours. nR = 1.62 nv = 1.66, δR = 3.1°
Answer:
Given: nR = 1.62, nV = 1.66, δR = 3.1°
To find:
i. Angular dispersion (δvr)
ii. Dispersive power (ωVR)
Formula:
i. δ = A (n – 1)
ii. δVR = δV – δR
(iii) ω = \(\frac{\delta_{\mathrm{V}}-\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{\left(\frac{\delta_{\mathrm{V}}+\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{2}\right)}\)
Calculation: From formula (i),
δR = A(nR – 1)
∴ A = \(\frac{\delta_{R}}{\left(n_{R}-1\right)}=\frac{3.1}{(1.62-1)}=\frac{3.1}{0.62}\)
= 5
δV = A(nv – 1) = 5 × (1.66 – 1) = 3.3C
From formula (ii),
δVR = 3.3 – 3.1 = 0.2°
From formula (iii),
ωVR = \(\frac{3.3-3.1}{\left(\frac{3.3+3.1}{2}\right)}=\frac{0.2}{6.4} \times 2=\frac{0.2}{3.2}=\frac{1}{16}\)
= 0.0625

Question 11.
Refractive index of a flint glass varies from 1.60 to 1.66 for visible range. Radii of curvature of a thin convex lens are 10 cm and 15 cm. Calculate the chromatic aberration between extreme colours.
Answer:
Given the refractive indices for extreme colours. As, nR < nV
nR = 1.60 and nV = 1.66
For convex lens,
R1 = 10 cm and R10 = -15 cm
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 31
= 0.11
∴ fV = 11 cm
∴ Longitudinal chromatic aberration
= fV – fR = 11 – 10 = 1 cm

Question 12.
A person uses spectacles of ‘number’ 2.00 for reading. Determine the range of magnifying power (angular magnification) possible. It is a concave convex lens (n = 1.5) having curvature of one of its surfaces to be 10 cm. Estimate that of the other.
Answer:
For a single concavo-convex lens, the magnifying power will be same as that for simple microscope As, the number represents the power of the lens,
P = \(\frac {1}{f}\) = 2 ⇒ f = 0.5 m.
∴ Range of magnifying power of a lens will be,
Mmin = \(\frac {D}{f}\) = \(\frac {0.25}{0.5}\) = 0.5
and Mmin = 1 + \(\frac {D}{f}\) = 1 + 0.5 = 1.5
Given that, n = 1.5, |R1| = 10 cm
f = 0.5 m = 50 cm
From lens maker’s equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 32

Question 13.
Focal power of the eye lens of a compound microscope is 6 dioptre. The microscope is to be used for maximum magnifying power (angular magnification) of at least 12.5. The packing instructions demand that length of the microscope should be 25 cm. Determine minimum focal power of the objective. How much will its radius of curvature be if it is a biconvex lens of n = 1.5.
Answer:
Focal power of the eye lens,
Pe = \(\frac {1}{f_e}\) = 6D
∴ fe = \(\frac {1}{6}\) = 0.1667 m = 16.67 cm
Now, as the magnifying power is maximum,
ve = 25 cm,
Also (Me)max = 1 + \(\frac {D}{f_e}\) = 1 + \(\frac {25}{16.67}\) ≈ 2.5
Given that,
M = m0 × Me = 12.5
∴ m0 × 2.5 = 12.5
∴ m0 = \(\frac {v_0}{u_0}\) = 5 ……….. (1)
From thin lens formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics 33
Length of a compound microscope,
L = |v0| +|u0|
∴ 25 = |v0| + 10
∴ |v0|= 15 cm
∴ |u0| = \(\frac {v_0}{5}\) = 3 cm …………… (from 1)
From lens formula for objective,
\(\frac {1}{f_0}\) = \(\frac {1}{v_0}\) – \(\frac {1}{u_0}\)
= \(\frac {1}{15}\) – \(\frac {1}{-3}\)
= \(\frac {2}{5}\)
∴ f0 = 2.5 cm = 0.025 m
Thus, focal power of objective,
P = \(\frac {1}{f_0(m)}\)
= \(\frac {1}{0.025}\) = 40 D
Using lens maker’s equation for a biconvex lens,
\(\frac{1}{f_{o}}=(n-1)\left(\frac{1}{R}-\frac{1}{-R}\right)\)
∴ \(\frac{1}{2.5}=(1.5-1)\left(\frac{2}{R}\right)=\frac{1}{R}\)
∴ R = 2.5 cm

11th Physics Digest Chapter 9 Optics Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall? (Textbook rage no 159)

What are laws of reflection and refraction?
Answer:
Laws of reflection:
a. Reflected ray lies in the plane formed by incident ray and the normal drawn at the point of incidence and the two rays are on either side of the normal.
b. Angles of incidence and reflection are equal (i = r).

Laws of refraction:
a. Refracted ray lies in the plane formed by incident ray and the normal drawn at the point of incidence; and the two rays are on either side of the normal.

b. Angle of incidence (θ1) and angle of refraction (θ2) are related by Snell’s law, given by, n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 where, n1, n2 = refractive indices of medium 1 and medium 2 respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Optics

Can you recall? (Textbook page no. 159)

Question 1.
What is refractive index?
Answer:
The ratio of velocity of light in vacuum to the velocity’ of light in a medium is called the refractive index of the medium.

Question 2.
What is total internal reflection?
Answer:
For angles of incidence larger than the critical angle, the angle of refraction is larger than 90°. Thus, all the incident light gets reflected back into the denser medium. This is called total internal reflection.

Question 3.
How does a rainbow form?
Answer:

  1. The rainbow appears in the sky after a rainfall.
  2. Water droplets present in the atmosphere act as small prism.
  3. When sunlight enters these water droplets it gets refracted and dispersed.
  4. This dispersed light gets totally reflected inside the droplet and again is refracted while coming out of the droplet.
  5. As a combined effect of all these phenomena, the seven coloured rainbow is observed.

Question 4.
What is dispersion of light?
Answer:
Splitting of a white light into its constituent colours is known as dispersion of light.

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers:

11th Physics Chapter 11 Exercise Electric Current Through Conductors Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 11

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Electric Current Through Conductors Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 11 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 11 Exercise Solutions 

1. Choose the correct Alternative.

Question 1.
You are given four bulbs of 25 W, 40 W, 60 W and 100 W of power, all operating at 230 V. Which of them has the lowest resistance?
(A) 25 W
(B) 40 W
(C) 60 W
(D) 100 W
Answer:
(D) 100 W

Question 2.
Which of the following is an ohmic conductor?
(A) transistor
(B) vacuum tube
(C) electrolyte
(D) nichrome wire
Answer:
(D) nichrome wire

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 3.
A rheostat is used
(A) to bring on a known change of resistance in the circuit to alter the current.
(B) to continuously change the resistance in any arbitrary manner and there by alter the current.
(C) to make and break the circuit at any instant.
(D) neither to alter the resistance nor the current.
Answer:
(B) to continuously change the resistance in any arbitrary manner and there by alter the current.

Question 4.
The wire of length L and resistance R is stretched so that its radius of cross-section is halved. What is its new resistance?
(A) 5R
(B) 8R
(C) 4R
(D) 16R
Answer:
(D) 16R

Question 5.
Masses of three pieces of wires made of the same metal are in the ratio 1 : 3 : 5 and their lengths are in the ratio 5 : 3 : 1. The ratios of their resistances are
(A) 1 : 3 : 5
(B) 5 : 3 : 1
(C) 1 : 15 : 125
(D) 125 : 15 : 1
Answer:
(D) 125 : 15 : 1

Question 6.
The internal resistance of a cell of emf 2 V is 0.1 Ω, it is connected to a resistance of 0.9 Ω. The voltage across the cell will be
(A) 0.5 V
(B) 1.8 V
(C) 1.95 V
(D) 3V
Answer:
(B) 1.8 V

Question 7.
100 cells each of emf 5 V and internal resistance 1 Ω are to be arranged so as to produce maximum current in a 25 Ω resistance. Each row contains equal number of cells. The number of rows should be
(A) 2
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 100
Answer:
(A) 2

Question 8.
Five dry cells each of voltage 1.5 V are connected as shown in diagram
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 1
What is the overall voltage with this arrangement?
(A) 0 V
(B) 4.5 V
(C) 6.0 V
(D) 7.5 V
Answer:
(B) 4.5 V

2. Give reasons / short answers

Question 1.
In given circuit diagram two resistors are connected to a 5V supply.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 2
i. Calculate potential difference across the 8Q resistor.
ii. A third resistor is now connected in parallel with 6 Ω resistor. Will the potential difference across the 8 Ω resistor be larger, smaller or same as before? Explain the reason for your answer.
Answer:
Total current flowing through the circuit,
I = \(\frac {V}{R_s}\)
= \(\frac {5}{8+6}\)
= \(\frac {5}{14}\) = 0.36 A
∴ Potential difference across 8 f2 (Vi) = 0.36 × 8
= 2.88 V

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

ii. Potential difference across 8 Ω resistor will be larger.
Reason: As per question, the new circuit diagram will be
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 3
When any resistor is connected parallel to 6 Ω resistance. Then the resistance across that branch (6 Ω and R Ω) will become less than 6 Ω. i.e., equivalent resistance of the entire circuit will decrease and hence current will increase. Since, V = IR, the potential difference across 8 Ω resistor will be larger.

Question 2.
Prove that the current density of a metallic conductor is directly proportional to the drift speed of electrons.
Answer:
i. Consider a part of conducting wire with its free electrons having the drift speed vd in the direction opposite to the electric field \(\vec{E}\).

ii. All the electrons move with the same drift speed vd and the current I is the same throughout the cross section (A) of the wire.

iii. Let L be the length of the wire and n be the number of free electrons per unit volume of the wire. Then the total number of free electrons in the length L of the conducting wire is nAL.

iv. The total charge in the length L is,
q = nALe ………….. (1)
where, e is the charge of electron.

v. Equation (1) is total charge that moves through any cross section of the wire in a certain time interval t.
∴ t = \(\frac {L}{v_d}\) ………….. (2)

vi. Current is given by,
I = \(\frac {q}{t}\) = \(\frac {nALe}{L/v_d}\) ……………. [From Equations (1) and (2)]
= n Avde
Hence
vd = \(\frac {1}{nAe}\)
= \(\frac {J}{ne}\) …………. (∵ J = \(\frac {1}{A}\))
Hence for constant ‘ne’, current density of a metallic conductor is directly proportional to the drift speed of electrons, J ∝ vd.

3. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Distinguish between ohmic and non ohmic substances; explain with the help of example.
Answer:

Ohmic substances Non-ohmic substances
1. Substances which obey ohm’s law are called ohmic substances. Substances which do not obey ohm’s law are called non-ohmic substances.
2. Potential difference (V) versus current (I) curve is a straight line. Potential difference (V) versus current (I) curve is not a straight line.
3. Resistance of these substances is constant i.e. they follow linear I-V characteristic. Resistance of these substances
Expression for resistance is, R = \(\frac {V}{I}\) Expression for resistance is,
R = \(\lim _{\Delta I \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta V}{\Delta I}=\frac{d V}{d I}\)
Examples: Gold, silver, copper etc. Examples:  Liquid electrolytes, vacuum tubes, junction diodes, thermistors etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 2.
DC current flows in a metal piece of non uniform cross-section. Which of these quantities remains constant along the conductor: current, current density or drift speed?
Answer:
Drift velocity and current density will change as it depends upon area of cross-section whereas current will remain constant.

4. Solve the following problems.

Question 1.
What is the resistance of one of the rails of a railway track 20 km long at 20°C? The cross-section area of rail is 25 cm² and the rail is made of steel having resistivity at 20°C as 6 × 10-8 Ω m.
Answer:
Given: l = 20 km = 20 × 10³ m,
A = 25 cm² = 25 × 10-4 m²,
ρ = 6 × 10-8 Ω m
To find: Resistance of rail (R)
Formula: ρ = \(\frac {RA}{l}\)
Calculation: From formula.
R = ρ\(\frac {l}{A}\)
∴ R = \(\frac {6×10^{-8}×20×10^3}{A}\) = \(\frac {6×4}{5}\) × 10-1
= 0.48 Ω

Question 2.
A battery after a long use has an emf 24 V and an internal resistance 380 Ω. Calculate the maximum current drawn from the battery. Can this battery drive starting motor of car?
Answer:
E = 24 V, r = 380 Ω
i. Maximum current (Imax)
ii. Can battery start the motor?
Formula: Imax = \(\frac {E}{r}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
Imax = \(\frac {24}{380}\) = 0,063 A
As, the value of current is very small compared to required current to run a starting motor of a car, this battery cannot be used to drive the motor.

Question 3.
A battery of emf 12 V and internal resistance 3 O is connected to a resistor. If the current in the circuit is 0.5 A,
i. Calculate resistance of resistor.
ii. Calculate terminal voltage of the battery when the circuit is closed.
Answer:
Given: E = 12 V, r = 3 Ω, I = 0.5 A
To find:
i. Resistance (R)
ii. Terminal voltage (V)
Formulae:
i. E = I (r + R)
ii. V = IR
Calculation: From formula (i),
E = Ir + IR
∴ R = \(\frac {E-Ir}{l}\)
= \(\frac {12-0.5×3}{0.5}\)
= 21 Ω
From formula (ii),
V = 0.5 × 21
= 10.5 V

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 4.
The magnitude of current density in a copper wire is 500 A/cm². If the number of free electrons per cm³ of copper is 8.47 × 1022, calculate the drift velocity of the electrons through the copper wire (charge on an e = 1.6 × 10-19 C)
Answer:
Given: J = 500 A/cm² = 500 × 104 A/m²,
n = 8.47 × 1022 electrons/cm³
= 8.47 × 1028 electrons/m³
e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
To Find: Drift velocity (vd)
Formula: vd = \(\frac {J}{ne}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
vd = \(\frac {500×10^4}{8.47×10^{28}×1.6×10^{-19}}\)
= \(\frac {500}{8.47×1.6}\) × 10-5
= {antilog [log 500 – log 8.47 – log 1.6]} × 10-5
= {antilog [2.6990 – 0.9279 -0.2041]} × 10-5
= {antilog [1.5670]} × 10-5
= 3.690 × 101 × 10-5
= 3.69 × 10-4 m/s

Question 5.
Three resistors 10 Ω, 20 Ω and 30 Ω are connected in series combination.
i. Find equivalent resistance of series combination.
ii. When this series combination is connected to 12 V supply, by neglecting the value of internal resistance, obtain potential difference across each resistor.
Answer:
Given: R1 = 10 Ω, R2 = 20 Ω,
R3 = 30 Ω, V = 12 V
To Find: i. Series equivalent resistance(Rs)
ii. Potential difference across each resistor (V1, V2, V3)
Formula: i. Rs = R1 + R2 + R3
ii. V = IR
Calculation:
From formula (i),
Rs = 10 + 20 + 30 = 60 Ω
From formula (ii),
I = \(\frac {V}{R}\) = \(\frac {12}{60}\) = 0.2 A
∴ Potential difference across R1,
V1 = I × R1 = 0.2 × 10 = 2 V
∴ Potential difference across R2,
V2 = 0.2 × 20 = 4 V
∴ Potential difference across R3,
V3 = 0.2 × 30 = 6 V

Question 6.
Two resistors 1 Ω and 2 Ω are connected in parallel combination.
i. Find equivalent resistance of parallel combination.
ii. When this parallel combination is connected to 9 V supply, by neglecting internal resistance, calculate current through each resistor.
Answer:
R1 = 1 kΩ = 10³ Ω,
R2 = 2 kΩ = 2 × 10³ Ω, V = 9 V
To find:
i. Parallel equivalent resistance (Rp)
ii. Current through 1 kΩ and 2 kΩ (I1 and I2)
Formula:
i. \(\frac {1}{R_p}\) = \(\frac {1}{R_1}\) + \(\frac {1}{R_2}\)
ii. V = IR
Calculation: From formula (i),
\(\frac {1}{R_p}\) = \(\frac {1}{10^3}\) + \(\frac {1}{2×10^3}\)
= \(\frac {3}{2×10^3}\)
∴ Rp = \(\frac {2×10^3}{3}\) = 0.66 kΩ
From formula (ii),
I1 = \(\frac {V}{R_1}\) + \(\frac {9}{10^3}\)
= 9 × 10-3 A
= 3 mA
I2 = \(\frac {V}{R_2}\) + \(\frac {9}{2×10^3}\)
= 4.5 × 10-3 A
= 4.5 mA

Question 7.
A silver wire has a resistance of 4.2 Ω at 27°C and resistance 5.4 Ω at 100°C. Determine the temperature coefficient of resistance.
Answer:
Given: R1 =4.2 Ω, R2 = 5.4 Ω,
T, = 27° C, T2= 100 °C
To find: Temperature coefficient of resistance (α)
Formula: α = \(\frac {R_2-R_1}{R_1(T_2-T_1)}\)
Calculation:
From Formula
α = \(\frac {5.4-4.2}{4.2(100-27)}\) = 3.91 × 10-3/°C

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 8.
A 6 m long wire has diameter 0.5 mm. Its resistance is 50 Ω. Find the resistivity and conductivity.
Answer:
Given: l = 6 m, D = 0.5 mm,
r = 0.25 mm = 0.25 × 10-3 m, R = 50 Ω
To find:
i. Resistivity (ρ)
ii. Conductivity (σ)
Formulae:
i. ρ = \(\frac {RA}{l}\) = \(\frac {Rπr^2}{l}\)
ii. σ = \(\frac {1}{ρ}\)
Calculation:
From formula (i),
ρ = \(\frac {50×3.142×(0.25×10^{-3})^2}{6}\)
= {antilog [log 50 + log 3.142 + 21og 0.25 -log 6]} × 10-6
= {antilog [ 1.6990 + 0.4972 + 2(1.3979) -0.7782]} × 10-6
= {antilog [2.1962 + 2 .7958 – 0.7782]} × 10-6
= {antilog [0.9920 – 0.7782]} × 10-6
= {antilog [0.2138]} × 10-6
= 1.636 × 10-6 Ω/m
From formula (ii),
σ = \(\frac {1}{1.636×10^{-6}}\)
= 0.6157 × 106
….(Using reciprocal from log table)
= 6.157 × 105 m/Ω

Question 9.
Find the value of resistances for the following colour code.
i. Blue Green Red Gold
ii. Brown Black Red Silver
iii. Red Red Orange Gold
iv. Orange White Red Gold
v. Yellow Violet Brown Silver
Answer:
i. Given: Blue – Green – Red – Gold
To find: Value of resistance
Formula: Value of resistance
= (xy × 10z ± T%)Ω
Calculation:

Colour Blue (x) Green (y) Red (z) Gold (T%)
Code 6 5 2 ± 5

From formula,
Value of resistance = (65 × 10² ± 5%) Ω
Value of resistance = 6.5 kΩ ± 5%

ii. Given: Brown – Black – Red – Silver
To find: Value of resistance
Formula: Value of resistance
= (xy × 10z + T%) Ω
Calculation:

Colour Brown (x) Black (y) Red (z) sliver (T%)
Code 1 0 2 ± 10

From formula,
Value of resistance = (10 × 10² ± 10%) Ω
Value of resistance = 1.0 kΩ ± 10%

iii. Given: Red – Red – Orange – Gold
To find: Value of the resistance
Formula: Value of the resistance
= (xy × 10z ± T%)
Calculation:

Colour Red (x) Red (y) Orange (z) Gold (T%)
Code 2 2 3 ± 5

From formula,
Value of resistance = (22 × 10³ ± 5%)Ω
Value of resistance = 22 kΩ ± 5%
[Note: The answer given above is presented considering correct order of magnitude.]

iv. Given: Orange – White – Red – Gold
To find: Value of the resistance
Formula: Value of the resistance
= (xy × 10z ± T%)
Calculation:

Colour Ornage (x) White (y) Red (z) Gold (T%)
Code 3 9 2 ± 5

From formula,
Value of resistance = (39 × 10² ± 5%) Ω
Value of resistance = 3.9 kΩ ± 5%

v. Given: Yellow-Violet-Brown-Silver
To find: Value of the resistance
Formula: Value of the resistance
= (xy × 10z ± T%)
Calculation:

Colour Yellow (x) violet (y) Brown (z) Sliver (T%)
Code 4 7 1 ± 10

From formula,
Value of resistance = (47 × 10 ± 10%) Ω
Value of resistance = 470 Ω ± 10%
[Note: The answer given above is presented considering correct order of magnitude.]

Question 10.
Find the colour code for the following value of resistor having tolerance ± 10%.
i. 330 Ω
ii. 100 Ω
iii. 47 kΩ
iv. 160 Ω
v. 1 kΩ
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors 4

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Question 11.
A current of 4 A flows through an automobile headlight. How many electrons flow through the headlight in a time of 2 hrs?
Answer:
Given: I = 4 A, t = 2 hrs = 2 × 60 × 60 s
To find: Number of electrons (N)
Formula: I = \(\frac {q}{t}\) = \(\frac {Ne}{t}\)
Calculation: As we know, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
From formula,
N = \(\frac {It}{e}\) = \(\frac {4×2×60×60}{1.6×10^{-19}}\) = 18 × 10-23

Question 12.
The heating element connected to 230 V draws a current of 5 A. Determine the amount of heat dissipated in 1 hour (J = 4.2 J/cal).
Answer:
Given: V = 230 V, I = 5 A,
At = 1 hour = 60 × 60 sec
To find: Heat dissipated (H)
Formula: H = ∆U = I∆tV
Calculation: From formula,
H = 5 × 60 × 60 × 230
= 4.14 × 106 J
Heat dissipated in calorie,
H = \(\frac {4.14×10^6}{4.2}\) = 985.7 × 10³ cal
= 985.7 kcal

11th Physics Digest Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall? (Textbookpage no. 207)

An electric current in a metallic conductor such as a wire is due to flow of electrons, the negatively charged particles in the wire. What is the role of the valence electrons which are the outermost electrons of an atom?
Answer:
i. The valence electrons become de-localized when large number of atoms come together in a metal.
ii. These electrons become conduction electrons or free electrons constituting an electric current when a potential difference is applied across the conductor.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Electric Current Through Conductors

Internet my friend (Textbook page no. 218)

https://www.britannica.com/science/supercond uctivityphysics

[Students are expected to visit the above mentioned website and Collect more information about superconductivity.]

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers:

11th Physics Chapter 2 Exercise Mathematical Methods Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 2

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Mathematical Methods Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 2 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 2 Exercise Solutions 

1. Choose the correct option.

Question 1.
The resultant of two forces 10 N and 15 N acting along + x and – x-axes respectively, is
(A) 25 N along + x-axis
(B) 25 N along – x-axis
(C) 5 N along + x-axis
(D) 5 N along – x-axis
Answer:
(D) 5 N along – x-axis

Question 2.
For two vectors to be equal, they should have the
(A) same magnitude
(B) same direction
(C) same magnitude and direction
(D) same magnitude but opposite direction
Answer:
(C) same magnitude and direction

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 3.
The magnitude of scalar product of two unit vectors perpendicular to each other is
(A) zero
(B) 1
(C) -1
(D) 2
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 4.
The magnitude of vector product of two unit vectors making an angle of 60° with each other is
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) \(\frac{3}{2}\)
(D) \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)

Question 5.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\), and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) are three vectors, then which of the following is not correct?
(A) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
(B) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)
(D) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) × (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)

2. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Show that \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(\frac{\hat{i}-\hat{j}}{\sqrt{2}}\) is a unit vector.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 1

Question 2.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{1}}\) = 3\(\hat{i}\) + 4\(\hat{j}\) + \(\hat{k}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{2}}\) = \(\hat{i}\) – \(\hat{j}\) – \(\hat{k}\), determine the magnitude of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{2}}\).
Solution:
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{2}}\) = (3\(\hat{i}\) + 4\(\hat{j}\) + \(\hat{k}\)) + (\(\hat{i}\) – \(\hat{j}\) – \(\hat{k}\))
= 3\(\hat{i}\) + 3\(\hat{i}\) + 4\(\hat{j}\) – \(\hat{j}\) + \(\hat{k}\) – \(\hat{k}\)
= 4\(\hat{i}\) + 3\(\hat{j}\)
∴ Magnitude of (\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{2}}\)),
|\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{2}}\)| = \(\sqrt{4^{2}+3^{2}}\) = \(\sqrt{25}\) = 5 units.
Answer:
Magnitude of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}_{2}}\) = 5 units.

Question 3.
For \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{1}}\) = 2\(\hat{i}\) – 3\(\hat{j}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\) = -6\(\hat{i}\) + 5\(\hat{j}\), determine the magnitude and direction of \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\).
Answer:
\(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\) = (2\(\hat{i}\) – 3\(\hat{j}\)) + (-6\(\hat{i}\) + 5\(\hat{j}\))
= (2\(\hat{i}\) – 6\(\hat{i}\)) + (-3\(\hat{j}\) + 5\(\hat{j}\))
= -4\(\hat{i}\) + 2\(\hat{j}\)
∴ |\(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\)| = \(\sqrt{(-4)^{2}+2^{2}}\) = \(\sqrt{20}\) = \(\sqrt{4 \times 5}\) = 2\(\sqrt{5}\)
Comparing \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\), with \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = Rx\(\hat{i}\) + Ry\(\hat{j}\)
⇒ Rx = -4 and Ry = 2
Taking θ to be angle made by \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) with X-axis,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 2
Answer:
Magnitude and direction of \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{1}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\), is
respectively 2\(\sqrt{5}\) and and tan-1\(\left(-\frac{1}{2}\right)\) with X – axis.

Question 4.
Find a vector which is parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) = \(\hat{i}\) – 2\(\hat{j}\) and has a magnitude 10.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 3
Substituting for wx in (i) using equation (ii),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 4
Using equation (ii),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 5
Answer:
Required vector is \(\frac{10}{\sqrt{5}} \hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – \(\frac{20}{\sqrt{5}} \hat{\mathbf{j}}\)

Alternate method:

When two vectors are parallel, one vector is scalar multiple of another,
i.e., if \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{w}}\) are parallel then, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{w}}\) = n\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) where, n is scalar.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 6

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 5.
Show that vectors \(\vec{a}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 6\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\vec{b}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + \(\frac{5}{2}\)\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are parallel.
Answer:
Let angle between two vectors be θ.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 7
⇒ Two vectors are parallel.

Alternate method:

\(\vec{a}\) = 2(\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + \(\frac{5}{2}\)\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 2\(\vec{b}\)
Since \(\vec{a}\) is a scalar multiple of \(\vec{b}\), the vectors are parallel.

3. Solve the following problems.

Question 1.
Determine \(\vec{a}\) × \(\vec{b}\), given \(\vec{a}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) and \(\vec{b}\) = 3\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\).
Answer:
Using determinant for vectors in two dimensions,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 8
Answer:
\(\vec{a}\) × \(\vec{b}\) gives \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)

Question 2.
Show that vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{a}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 6\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{b}}\) = 3\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 6\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{c}}\) = 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are mutually perpendicular.
Solution:
As dot product of two perpendicular vectors is zero. Taking dot product of \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 9
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 10
Combining two results, we can say that given three vectors \(\vec{a}\), \(\vec{b}\), and \(\vec{c}\) are mutually perpendicular to each other.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 3.
Determine the vector product of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{1}}\) = 2\(\hat{i}\) + 3\(\hat{j}\) – \(\hat{k}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\) = \(\hat{i}\) + 2\(\hat{j}\) – 3\(\hat{k}\) are perpendicular to each other, determine the value of a.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 11
Answer:
Required vector product is -7\(\hat{i}\) + 5\(\hat{j}\) + \(\hat{k}\)

Question 4.
Given \(\bar{v}_{1}\) = 5\(\hat{i}\) + 2\(\hat{j}\) and \(\bar{v}_{2}\) = a\(\hat{i}\) – 6\(\hat{j}\) are perpendicular to each other, determine the value of a.
Solution:
As \(\bar{v}_{1}\) and \(\bar{v}_{2}\) are perpendicular to each other, θ = 90°
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 12
Answer:
Value of a is \(\frac{12}{5}\).

Question 5.
Obtain derivatives of the following functions:
(i) x sin x
(ii) x4 + cos x
(iii) x/sin x
Answer:
(i) x sin x
Solution:
\(\frac{d}{d x}\)[f1(x) × f2(x)] = f1(x)\(\frac{\mathrm{df}_{2}(\mathrm{x})}{\mathrm{dx}}\) + \(\frac{\mathrm{df}_{1}(\mathrm{x})}{\mathrm{dx}}\)f2(x)
For f1(x) = x and f2(x) = sin x
\(\frac{d}{d x}\)(x sin x) = x\(\frac{\mathrm{d}(\sin \mathrm{x})}{\mathrm{dx}}\) + \(\frac{d(x)}{d x}\) sin x
= x cos x + 1 × sin x
= sin x + x cos x

(ii) x4 + cos x
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 13

(iii) \(\frac{\mathbf{x}}{\sin x}\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 14

[Note: As derivative of (sin x) is cos x, negative sign that occurs in rule for differentiation for quotient of two functions gets retained in final answer]

Question 6.
Using the rule for differentiation for quotient of two functions, prove that \(\frac{d}{d x}\left(\frac{\sin x}{\cos x}\right)\) = sec2x
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 15

Question 7.
Evaluate the following integral:
(i) \(\int_{0}^{\pi / 2} \sin x d x\)
(ii) \(\int_{1}^{5} x d x\)
Answer:
(i) \(\int_{0}^{\pi / 2} \sin x d x\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 16

(ii) \(\int_{1}^{5} x d x\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 17

11th Physics Digest Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall? (Textbook Page No. 16)

Question 1.
Define scalars and vectors.
Answer:

  1. Physical quantities which can be completely described b their magnitude (a number and unit) are called scalars.
  2. Physical quantities which need magnitude as well as direction for their complete description are called vectors.

Question 2.
Which of the following are scalars or vectors?
Displacements, distance travelled, velocity, speed, force, work done, energy
Answer:

  1. Scalars: Distance travelled, speed, work done, energy.
  2. Vectors: Displacement, velocity, force.

Question 3.
What is the difference between a scalar and a vector?
Answer:

No. Scalars Vectors
i. It has magnitude only It has magnitude as well as direction.
ii. Scalars can be added or subtracted according to the rules of algebra. Vectors are added or subtracted by geometrical (graphical) method or vector algebra.
iii. It has no specific representation. It is represented by symbol (→) arrow.
iv. The division of a scalar by another scalar is valid. The division of a vector by another vector is not valid.
Example:
Length, mass, time, volume, etc.
Example:
Displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, etc.

Internet my friend (Textbook page no. 28)

    1. hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/vect. html#veccon
    2. hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/ hframe.html

Answer:
[Students can use links given above as reference and collect information about mathematical methods]

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers:

11th Biology Chapter 16 Exercise Skeleton and Movement Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Biology Chapter 16

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Textbook Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Skeleton and Movement Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Biology Chapter 16 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Biology Class 11 Chapter 16 Exercise Solutions

1. Choose the correct option

Question (A).
The functional unit of striated muscle is …………..
a. cross bridges
b. myofibril
c. sarcomere
d. z-band
Answer:
c. sarcomere

Question (B).
A person slips from the staircase and breaks his ankle bone. Which bones are involved?
a. Carpals
b. Tarsal
c. Metacarpals
d. Metatarsals
Answer:
b. Tarsal

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question (C).
Muscle fatigue is due to accumulation of ……..
a. pyruvic acid
b. lactic acid
c. malic acid
d. succinic acid
Answer:
b. lactic acid

Question (D).
Which one of the following is NOT antagonistic muscle pair?
a. Flexo-extensor
b. Adductor-abductor
c. Levator-depressor
d. Sphinetro-suprinater
Answer:
d. Sphinetro-suprinater

Question (E).
Swelling of sprained foot is reduced by soaking in hot water containing a large amount of common salt,
a. due to osmosis
b. due to plasmolysis
c. due to electrolysis
d. due to photolysis
Answer:
a. due to osmosis

Question (F).
Role of calcium in muscle contraction is ……….
a. to break the cross bridges as a cofactor in the hydrolysis of ATP
b. to bind with troponin, changing its shape so that the actin filament is exposed
c. to transmit the action potential across the neuromuscular junction.
d. to re-establish the polarisation of the plasma membrane following an action potential
Answer:
b. to bind with troponin, changing its shape so that the actin filament is exposed

Question (G).
Hyper-secretion of parathormone can cause which of the following disorders?
a. Gout
b. Rheumatoid arthritis
c. Osteoporosis
d. Gull’s disease
Answer:
c. Osteoporosis

Question (H).
Select correct option between two nasal bones
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 1
Answer:
(c) Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 2

Question 2.
Answer the following questions

Question (A).
What kind of contraction occurs in your neck muscles while you are reading your class assignment?
Answer:

  1. Isometric contractions occur in the neck muscles while reading class assignment.
  2. These contractions are important for supporting objects in a fixed position.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question (B).
Observe the diagram and enlist importance of ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 3
Answer:

  1. A – Posterior portion of vertebral foramen of atlas vertebrae; Importance – The spinal cord runs through this portion of vertebral foramen
  2. B – Anterior portion of vertebral foramen of axis vertebrae; Importance – In this portion, the odontoid process of axis vertebrae forms ‘NO’ joint.
  3. C – Inferior articular facet; Importance – It articulates with superior articular facet of axis and permits rotatory movement of head.

Question (C).
Raju intends to train biceps; while exercising using dumbbells, which joints should remain stationary and which should move?
Answer:
While performing exercise of biceps using dumbbells, the joint which should remain stationary are wrist joint or radiocarpal joint, ball and socket joint of shoulder. The only joint which should move is hinge joint of elbow.

Question (D).
In a road accident, Moses fractured his leg. One of the passers by, tied a wodden plank to the fractured leg while Moses
was rushed to the hospital Was this essential? Why?
Answer:

  1. Fracture is a significant and traumatic injury which requires medical attention however, getting timely first aid is important.
  2. If any bone is fractured, it is essential that the fractured part be immobilized to prevent further injury. It can be done with the help of any available wooden plank or batons or rulers. Thus, a wooden plank was tied to Moses’s fractured leg as a first aid for fracture.
  3. A fractured bone is immobilized to prevent the sharp edges of the fractured bone from moving and cutting tissue, muscle, blood vessels and nerves. Immobilization can also help reduce pain or control shock.

Question (E).
Sprain is more painful than fracture. Why?
Answer:

  1. A sprain is an injury that involves the ligaments (tissues that connect bones at joints), whereas a fracture is an injury that involves bones.
  2. Sprains can be of three degree: 1st degree: Mild with micro-tears, 2nd degree: Partial with visible tear in ligament, 3rd degree: Completely torn ligament.
  3. If a sprain is 3rd degree, it will be more painful than a fracture. It usually requires a surgery to fix this injury, while breaking a bone, most of the time does not require surgery.
  4. Breaks or Fractures also vary greatly. Minor fractures (like stress/ hairline fractures) are much less painful than compound/ complex fractures in which the bone may be cracked into half.
  5. Blood supply is essential for growth and regeneration. Bones are highly vascularized whereas, ligaments are not. This causes the bones to heal comparatively faster than severe sprains. Thus, the duration of enduring pain until the injury heals also differs.
  6. Also, ligaments have a rich supply of sensory nerves, which may also be responsible for an elevated sense of pain during severe sprains.

[Note: 1st and 2nd degree sprains are not very serious and may be lesser painful than a fracture. Depending on the severity of the injury, intensity of pain will vary.]

Question (F).
Why a red muscle can work for a prolonged period whereas white muscle fibre suffers from fatigue after a shorter work? (Refer to chapter animal tissues.)
Answer:

  1. Red muscle fibres contain large amount of myoglobin and mitochondria (site of aerobic respiration), whereas white muscles fibres contain lesser amount of myoglobin and mitochondria.
  2. Myoglobin is an iron-containing pigment that carries oxygen molecules to muscle tissues. Abundance of these pigments in red muscle fibres supports higher rate of aerobic respiration, whereas white muscle fibres have less mitochondria and depend upon anaerobic respiration.
  3. Anaerobic respiration in muscle white fibres leads to the production of lactic acid and accumulation of higher of levels lactic acid can result in fatigue in white muscle fibres.

Thus, red muscle fibres can perform prolonged work and show less fatigue due to accumulation of negligible amount loss or of lactic acid, whereas white muscle fibres suffer from fatigue after a shorter work due to accumulation of higher amount of lactic acid.

3. Answer the following questions in detail

Question (A).
How is the structure of sarcomere suitable for the contractility of the muscle? Explain its function according to sliding
filament theory. (Refer to chapter animal tissues.)
Answer:
i. Sarcomere is the functional unit of myofibril. It has specific arrangement of actin and myosin filaments. The components of sarcomere are organized into variety of bands and zones. Actin and myosin are referred as contractile proteins. Actin is called as thin filament whereas myosin in called as thick filament. The structure of sarcomere:

ii. ‘A’ band – dark bands present at the centre of sarcomere and contain myosin as well as actin.
‘H’ zone or Hensen’s zone – light area present at the centre of ‘A’ band
‘M’ line – present at the centre of ‘H’ zone
‘I’ band – light bands present on the either side of ‘A’ band containing only actin
Z’ line – adjacent ‘I’ bands are separated by ‘Z’ line.

iii. Sliding filament theory: It was put forth by H.E Huxley and A.F Huxley. It is also known as ‘Walk along theory’ or Ratchet theory.

  • According to the sliding filament theory, the interaction between actin and myosin filaments is the basic cause of muscle contraction. The actin filaments are interdigitated with myosin filaments.
  • The head of the myosin is joined to the actin backbone by a cross bridge forming a hinge joint. From this joint, myosin head cannot tilt forward or backward. This movement is an active process as it utilizes ATP.
  • Myosin head contains ATPase activity. It can derive energy by the breakdown of ATP molecule. This energy can be used for the movement of myosin head.
  • During contraction, the myosin head gets attached to the active site of actin filaments and pull them inwardly so that the actin filaments slide over the myosin filaments. This results in the contraction of muscle fibre.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 6

Question (B).
Ragini, a 50 year old office goer, suffered hair-line cracks in her right and left foot in short intervals of time. She was worried about minor jerks leading to hair line cracks in bones. Doctor explained to her why it must be happening and prescribed medicines.

What must be the cause of Ragini’s problem? Why has it occurred? What precautions she should have taken earlier? What care she should take in future?
Answer:

  1. Considering Ragini’s age, she may be undergoing menopause. After menopause, oestrogen level declines resulting in lower bone density.
  2. Osteoporosis:
    • In this disorder, bones become porous and hence brittle. It is primarily age related disease and is more common in women than men.
    • Osteoporosis may be caused due to decreasing estrogen secretion after menopause, deficiency of vitamin D, low calcium diet, decreased secretion of sex hormones and thyrocalcitonin.
  3. As age advances, bone resorption outpaces bone formation. Hence, the bones lose mass and become brittle. More calcium is lost in urine, sweat, etc., than it is gained through diet. Thus, prevention of disease is better than treatment by consuming adequate amount of calcium and exercise at young age.
  4. A person with previous hairline fractures is more susceptible to reoccurrence of fractures. Hence, Ragini needs to take her medications and supplements properly, avoid jerky movements and maintain body weight.

Question (C).
How does structure of actin and myosin help muscle contraction?
Answer:
i. Myosin filament:

  1. Each myosin filament is a polymerized protein.
    Many meromyosins (monomeric proteins) constitute one thick filament.
  2. Myosin molecule consists of two heavy chains (heavy meromyosin / HMM) coiled around each other forming a double helix. One end of each of these chains is projected outwardly is known as cross bridge. This end folds to form a globular protein mass called myosin head.
  3. Two light chains are associated with each head forming 4 light chains/light meromyosin / LMM.
  4. Myosin head has a special ATPase activity. It can split ATP to produce energy.
  5. Myosin contributes 55% of muscle proteins.
  6. In sarcomere, myosin tails are arranged to point towards the centre of the sarcomere and the heads point to the sides of the myofilament band.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 7

ii. Actin filament: It is a complex type of contractile protein. It is made up of three components:

  1. F actin: It forms the backbone of actin filament. F actin is made up of two helical strands. Each strand is composed of polymerized G actin molecules. One ADP molecule is attached to G actin molecule.
  2. Tropomyosin: The actin filament contains two additional protein strands that are polymers of tropomyosin molecules. Each strand is loosely attached to an F actin. In the resting stage, tropomyosin physically covers the active myosin-binding site of the actin strand.
  3. Troponin: It is a complex of three globular proteins, is attached approx. 2/3rd distance along each tropomyosin molecule. It has affinity for actin, tropomyosin and calcium ions. The troponin complex is believed to attach the tropomyosin to the actin. The strong affinity of troponin for calcium ions is believed to initiate the contraction process.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 8

Question (D).
Justify the structure of atlas and axis vertebrae with respect to their position and function.
Answer:
i. Atlas vertebrae:

  1. Atlas is the ring-like, 1st cervical vertebrae. It has anterior, posterior arches and large lateral masses.
  2. It lacks centrum and spinous process. The superior surfaces of the lateral masses are concave and are known as superior articular facets.
  3. These facets articulate with the occipital condyles of the occipital bone thereby forming atlanto-occipital joints. This articulation permits ‘YES movement’ or nodding movement.
  4. The inferior surfaces of the lateral masses known as inferior articular facets articulate with axis vertebrae,

ii. Axis vertebrae:

  1. It is the 2nd cervical vertebrae.
  2. A peg-like process called odontoid process projects superiorly through the anterior portion of the vertebral foramen of the atlas.
  3. The odontoid process forms a pivot on which the atlas and head rotate. This arrangement allows ‘NO movement’ or side to side movement of the head.
  4. The articulation formed between the anterior arch of atlas, the odontoid process of the axis and between their articular facets is called as atlanto-axial joint.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question (E).
Observe the blood report given below and diagnose the possible disorder.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 9
Answer:
On observing Report D, it is clear that the level of uric acid is more than normal, thus the patient must be suffering from gouty arthritis.

Also, the elevated blood urea nitrogen (BUN) indicates dysfunctional liver and/ or kidneys. It generally occurs due to decrease in GFR, caused by renal disease or obstruction of urinary tract.

Question 4.
Write short notes on following points

Question (A).
Actin filament
Answer:
Actin filament: It is a complex type of contractile protein. It is made up of three components:

  1. F actin: It forms the backbone of actin filament. F actin is made up of two helical strands. Each strand is composed of polymerized G actin molecules. One ADP molecule is attached to G actin molecule.
  2. Tropomyosin: The actin filament contains two additional protein strands that are polymers of tropomyosin molecules. Each strand is loosely attached to an F actin. In the resting stage, tropomyosin physically covers the active myosin-binding site of the actin strand.
  3. Troponin: It is a complex of three globular proteins, is attached approx. 2/3rd distance along each tropomyosin molecule. It has affinity for actin, tropomyosin and calcium ions. The troponin complex is believed to attach the tropomyosin to the actin. The strong affinity of troponin for calcium ions is believed to initiate the contraction process.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 11

Question (B).
Myosin filament
Answer:
i. Myosin filament:

  1. Each myosin filament is a polymerized protein.
    Many meromyosins (monomeric proteins) constitute one thick filament.
  2. Myosin molecule consists of two heavy chains (heavy meromyosin / HMM) coiled around each other forming a double helix. One end of each of these chains is projected outwardly is known as cross bridge. This end folds to form a globular protein mass called myosin head.
  3. Two light chains are associated with each head forming 4 light chains/light meromyosin / LMM.
  4. Myosin head has a special ATPase activity. It can split ATP to produce energy.
  5. Myosin contributes 55% of muscle proteins.
  6. In sarcomere, myosin tails are arranged to point towards the centre of the sarcomere and the heads point to the sides of the myofilament band.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 10

Question (C).
Role of calcium ions in contraction and relaxation of muscles.
Answer:
Calcium ions play a major role in contraction and relaxation of muscles.

  1. Calcium ions are released from the sarcoplasm during muscle contraction and stored in sarcoplasmic reticulum during muscle relaxation.
  2. When a skeletal muscle is excited and an action potential travels along the T tubule, the concentration of calcium ions increases.
  3. These calcium ions bind to troponin which in turn undergoes a conformational change that causes tropomyosin to move away from the myosin-binding sites on actin. Once these binding sites are free, myosin heads bind to them to form cross-bridges and the muscle fiber contracts.
  4. The decrease in calcium ion concentration in the sarcoplasmic reticulum causes tropomyosin to slide back and block the myosin binding sites on actin. This causes the muscle to relax.

Question 5.
Draw labelled diagrams

Question (A).
Synovial joint.
Answer:
i. Synovial joints / freely movable joints / diarthroses:

  1. It is characterized by presence of a space called synovial cavity between articulating bones that renders free movement at the joint.
  2. The articulating surfaces of bones at a synovial joint are covered by a layer of hyaline cartilage. It reduces friction during movement and helps to absorb shock.
  3. Synovial cavity is lined by synovial membrane that forms synovial capsule. Synovial membrane secretes synovial fluid. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 12
  4. Synovial fluid is a clear, viscous, straw coloured fluid similar to lymph. It is viscous due to hyaluronic acid. The synovial fluid also contains nutrients, mucous and phagocytic cells to remove microbes.
    Synovial fluid lubricates the joint, absorbs shocks, nourishes the hyaline cartilage and removes waste materials from hyaline cartilage cells (as cartilage is avascular). Phagocytic cells destroy microbes and cellular debris formed by wear and tear of the joint.
  5. If the joint is immobile for a while, the synovial fluid becomes viscous and as joint movement starts, it becomes less viscous.
  6. The joint is provided with capsular ligament and numerous accessory ligaments. The fibrous capsule is attached to periosteum of articulating bones. The ligament helps in avoiding dislocation of joint.
  7. The types of synovial joints are on follows:

1. Pivot joint: In this type of joint, the rounded or pointed surface of one bone articulates with a ring formed partly by another bone and partly by the ligament. Rotation only around its own longitudinal axis is possible. e.g. in joint between atlas and axis vertebrae, head turns side ways to form ‘NO’ joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 13

2. Ball and socket joint: The ball like surface of one bone fits into cup like depression of another bone forming a movable joint. Multi-axial movements are possible. This type of joint allows movements along all three axes and in all directions. e.g. Shoulder and hip joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 14

3. Hinge joint: In a hinge joint, convex surface of one bone fits into concave surface of another bone. In most hinge joints one bone remains stationary and other moves. The angular opening and closing motion (like hinge) is possible. In this joint only mono-axial movement takes place like flexion and extension. e.g. Elbow and knee joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 15

4. Condyloid joint: It is an ellipsoid joint. The convex oval shaped projection of one bone fits into oval shaped depression in another bone. it is a biaxial joint because it permits movement along two axes viz, flexion, extension, abduction, adduction and circumduction is possible. e.g. Metacarpophalangeal joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 16

5. Gliding joint: It is a planar joint, where the articulating surfaces of bones are flat or slightly curved. These joints are non-axial because the motion they allow does not occur along an axis or a plane. e.g. Intercarpal and intertarsal joints.

6. Saddle joint: This joint is a characteristic of Homo sapiens. Here the articular surface of one bone is saddle-shaped and that of other bone fits into saddle (each bone forming this joint have both concave and convex areas). It is a modified condyloid joint in which movement is somewhat more free. It is a biaxial joint that allows flexion, extension, abduction, adduction and circumduction.
e.g. Carpometacarpellar joint between carpal (trapezium) and metacarpal of thumb.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 17

Question (B).
Different cartilagenous joints.
Answer:
Cartilaginous / slightly movable joints / amphiarthroses:
These joints are neither fixed nor freely movable. Articulating bones are held together by hyaline or fibrocartilages. They are further classified as

a. Synchondroses: The two bones are held together by hyaline cartilage. They are meant for growth. On completion of growth, the joint gets ossified, e.g. Epiphyseal plate found between epiphysis and diaphysis of a long bone, Rib – Sternum junction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 18

b. Symphysis: In this type of joint, broad flat disc of fibrocartilage connects two bones. It occurs in mid-line of the body. e.g. Intervertebral discs, manubrium and sternum, pubic symphysis.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 19
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 19.1

Practical / Project :

Identify the following diagrams and demonstrate the concepts in classroom.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 20
Answer:
The diagrams A, B and C represent Class I, Class II and Class III lever respectively.
For description:

  1. Class I lever: The joint between the first vertebra and occipital condyle of skull is an example of Class I lever. The force is directed towards the joints (fulcrum); contraction of back muscle provides force while the part of head that is raised acts as
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 21
  2. Class II lever: Human body raised on toes is an example of Class II lever. Toe acts as fulcrum, contracting calf muscles provide the force while raised body acts as resistance.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 22
  3. Class III lever: Flexion of forearm at elbow exhibit lever of class III. Elbow joint acts as fulcrum and radius, ulna provides resistance. Contracting bicep muscles provides force for the movement.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 23

[Students are expected to perform the given activity on their own]

12th Biology Digest Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement Intext Questions and Answers

Movements And Locomotion (Textbook Page No. 193)

Question 1.
Streaming of protoplasm, peristalsis, walking, running, etc. Which of the above-mentioned movements are internal? Which are external? Can you add few more examples?
Answer:

  1. Streaming of protoplasm, peristalsis are internal movements. Walking and running are external movements.
  2. Examples of internal movement: Contraction and relaxation heart, inspiration and expiration, contraction of blood vessels, etc.
  3. Examples of external movement: Swimming; movement tongue, jaws, snout, tentacles, movement of ear pinna, etc.

Can you recall? (Textbook Page No. 193)

Question 1.
Which are different types of muscular tissues?
Answer:

  1. Smooth / non-striated / visceral / involuntary muscles
  2. Cardiac muscles
  3. Skeletal / straited / voluntary muscles.

Question 2.
Name the type of muscles which bring about running and speaking.
Answer:
Skeletal muscles (Voluntary muscles)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 3.
Name the muscles which do not contract as per our will.
Answer:
Involuntary muscles (smooth muscles and cardiac muscles)

Question 4.
Which type of muscles show rhythmic contractions?
Answer:
Cardiac muscles

Question 5.
Which type of muscle is present in the diaphragm of the respiratory system?
Answer:
Skeletal muscle

Question 6.
State the functions of:

  1. Smooth muscles
  2. Cardiac muscles
  3. Striated muscles

Answer:

  1. Smooth muscles: They bring about involuntary movements like peristalsis in the alimentary canal, constriction and dilation of blood vessels.
  2. Cardiac muscles: They bring about contraction and relaxation of the heart.
  3. Striated muscles: They control voluntary movements of limbs, head, trunk, eyes, etc.

Can you recall? (Textbook Page No. 193)

Question 1.
Name the part of human skeleton situated along the vertical axis.
Answer:
Axial skeleton

Question 2.
Give an account of bones of human skull.
Answer:
Skull is made up of 22 bones. It is located at the superior end of vertebral column. The bones of skull are
joined by fixed or immovable joints except for jaw.

Skull consists of cranium or brain box and facial bones.

i. Cranium: It is made up of four median bones and two paired bones.

  1. Frontal bone: It is median bone (unpaired) forming forehead, roof of orbit (eye socket) and the most anterior part of cranium. It is connected to two parietals, sphenoid and ethmoid bone.
  2. Parietal bones: These paired bones form the roof of cranium and greater portion of sides of the cranium.
  3. Temporal bones: These paired bones are situated laterally just above the ear on either side. Each temporal bone gives out zygomatic process that joins zygomatic bone to form zygomatic arch. Just at the base of zygomatic process is mandibular fossa, a depression for mandibles (lower jaw bone) that forms the only movable joint of the skull. This bone harbors the ear canal that directs sound waves into the ear. The processes of temporal bones provide points for attachment for various muscles of neck and tongue.
  4. Occipital bone: It is a single bone present at the back of the head. It forms the posterior part and most of the base of cranium. The inferior part of this bone shows foramen magnum, the opening through which medulla oblongata connects with spinal cord. On the either sides of foramen magnum are two prominent protuberances called occipital condyles. These fit into the corresponding depressions present in 1st vertebra.
  5. Sphenoid bone: Median bone present at the base of the skull that articulates with all other cranial bones and holds them together. This butterfly shaped bone has a saddle shaped region called sella turcica. In this hypophyseal fossa, the pituitary gland is lodged.
  6. Ethmoid bone: This median bone is spongy in appearance. It is located anterior to sphenoid and posterior to nasal bones. It contributes to formation of nasal septum and is major supporting structure of nasal cavity.

ii. Facial Bones: Fourteen facial bones give a characteristic shape to the face. The growth of face stops of the
age of 16.
Following bones comprise the facial bones:

  1. Nasals: These are paired bones that form the bridge of nose.
  2. Maxillae: These form the upper jaw bones. They are paired bones that join with all facial bones except mandible. Upper row of teeth are lodged maxillae.
  3. Palatines: These are paired bones forming the roof of buccal cavity or floor of the nasal cavity.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 31
  4. Zygomatic bones: They are commonly called as cheek bones.
  5. Lacrimal bones: These are the smallest amongst the facial bones.
    These bones form the medial wall of each orbit. They have lacrimal fossa that houses lacrimal sacs. These sacs gather tears and send them to nasal cavity.
  6. Inferior nasal conchae: They form the part of lateral wall of nasal cavity. They help to swirl and filter air before it passes to lungs.
  7. Vomer: The median, roughly triangular bone that forms the inferior portion of nasal septum.
  8. Mandible: This median bone forms the lower jaw. It is the largest and strongest facial bone. It is the only movable bone of skull. It has curved horizontal body and two perpendicular branches i.e. rami. These help in attachment of muscles. It has lower row of teeth lodged in it.

Think about it. (Textbook Page No. 193)

Question 1.
Did you ever feel tickling in muscles?
Answer:
Yes, the tickling sensation in muscles can be felt and sometimes it is also accompanied by itching sensation.

Question 2.
What is locomotion?
Answer:
The change in locus of whole body of living organism from one place to another place is called locomotion.

Question 3.
State the four basic types of locomotory movements seen in animals.
Answer:
The four basic types locomotory movements seen in animals are:

  1. Amoeboid movement: It is performed by pseudopodia, e.g. leucocytes.
  2. Ciliary movement: It is performed by cilia, e.g. ciliated epithelium. In Paramoecium, cilia help in passage of food through cytopharynx.
  3. Whirling movement: It is performed by flagella, e.g. sperms.
  4. Muscular movement: It is performed by muscles, with the help of bones and joints.

Question 4.

Question 1.
Why do muscles show spasm after rigorous contraction?
Answer:

  1. Rigorous contraction of muscles occurs during strenuous activities (swimming. running, cycling, aerobics. etc.)
  2. Muscle contraction requires energy. Glucose in muscle cells breakdown during anerobic respiration resulting in accumulation of lactic acid.
  3. This lactic acid buildup triggers muscle spasm around muscle cells.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 2.
Why do we shiver during winter?
Answer:

  1. Humans are homeotherms as the can regulate their body temperature with respect to the surrounding temperature. During winter, when temperature falls, the thermoreceptors detect the change in temperature and send signals to the brain.
  2. Shivering reflex i.e. rapid contraction of muscles is triggered by the brain to generate heat and raise the body temperature.

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 194)

Question 1.
Why are movement and locomotion necessary among animals?
Answer:

  • Movement is one of the important characteristics of all the living organisms. Animals exhibit wide range of
    movements like rhythmic beating of heart, movement of diaphragm during respiration, ingestion of food,
    movement of eyeballs, etc.
  • Locomotion results into change in place or location of an organism. Animals locomote in search of food, mate, shelter, breeding ground. while escaping from the enemy, etc.
  • Thus, locomotion and movement are necessary to support the living of animals.

Question 2.
All locomotions are movements but all movements are not locomotion. Justify
Answer:
Locomotion occurs when body changes its position, however all movements may not result in locomotion. Thus, all locomotions are movements but all movements are not locomotion.

Question 3.
Kriti was diagnosed with knee tendon injury. She asked the doctor whether she will be able to walk due to the injury? If not then state the reason.
Answer:
Knee tendon injury affects the ability to walk. Kriti may not be able to walk freely as the tendons attached to the bones help in the movement of the parts of skeleton.

Question 4.
What are antagonistic muscles? Explain with example.
Answer:

  1. The muscles that work in pairs and produce opposite action are known as antagonistic muscles, e.g. biceps and triceps of upper arm.
  2. The biceps (flexors) bring flexion (folding) and triceps (extensors) bring extension of the elbow joint.
  3. One member from a pair is capable of bending the joint by pulling of bones the other member is capable of straightening the same joint by pulling.
  4. In antagonistic pair of muscles, one member is stronger than the other, e.g. The biceps are stronger than the triceps.

Question 5.
Describe the antagonistic muscles in detail.
Answer:
Following are the important antagonistic muscles:

  1. Flexor and extensor: Flexor muscle on contraction results into bending or flexion of joint, e.g. Biceps. Extensor muscle on contraction results in straightening or extension of a joint, e.g. Triceps.
  2. Abductor and adductor: Abductor muscle moves a body part away from the body axis. e.g. Deltoid muscle of shoulder moves the arm away from the body. Adductor muscle moves a body part towards the body axis, e.g. Latissimus dorsi of shoulder moves the arm near the body.
  3. Pronator and supinator: Pronator turns the palm downwards and supinator turns the palm upward.
  4. Levator and depressor: Levator raises a body part and the depressors lower the body part.
  5. Protractor and retractor: Protractor moves forward, whereas the retractor moves backward.
  6. Sphincters: Circular muscles present in the inner walls of anus, stomach, etc., for closure and opening.

Question 6.
Differentiate between:
i. Flexor and extensor muscles
Answer:

Flexor Muscles Extensor Muscles
a. Flexor muscles contract and bring about the bending or flexion of joint. a. Extensor muscles contract and bring about the straightening or extension of joint.
b. These muscles decrease the angle between the bones on two sides of a joint. b. These muscles increase the angle between the components of limb.
e.g. Biceps e.g. Triceps

ii. Pronator and supinator: Pronator turns the palm downwards and supinator turns the palm upward.

Can you recall? (Textbook Page No. 194)

Question 1.
Comment on contraction of skeletal muscles.
Answer:
Skeletal muscles show quick and strong voluntary contractions. They bring about voluntary movements of the body. For mechanism of muscle contraction:

When the muscles are relaxed, the active sites remain covered with tropomyosin and troponin complex. Due to this, myosin cannot interact with active site of actin and thus contraction cannot occur.

  1. When an impulse (action potential) comes to muscle through motor end plate, it spreads throughout the sarcolemma of the myofibril.
  2. The transverse tubules of sarcoplasmic reticulum release large number of Ca++ ions into sarcoplasm. These calcium ions interact with the troponin molecules and the interaction inactivates troponin-tropomyosin complex. This causes change in the structure of tropomyosin.
  3. As a result, tropomyosin gets detached from the active site of actin (F actin) filament, exposing the active site for actin.
  4. The myosin head cleaves the ATP to derive energy and gets attached to the uncovered active site of actin. This results into the formation of acto-myosin complex.
  5. The myosin heads are now tilted backwards and pull the attached actin filament inwardly. This results in contraction of the muscle fibres.

Do You Know How (Textbook Page No. 195)

Question 1.
Do skeletal muscles contract and bring about movement and locomotion?
Answer:
When the muscles are relaxed, the active sites remain covered with tropomyosin and troponin complex. Due to this, myosin cannot interact with active site of actin and thus contraction cannot occur.

  1. When an impulse (action potential) comes to muscle through motor end plate, it spreads throughout the sarcolemma of the myofibril.
  2. The transverse tubules of sarcoplasmic reticulum release large number of Ca++ ions into sarcoplasm. These calcium ions interact with the troponin molecules and the interaction inactivates troponin-tropomyosin complex. This causes change in the structure of tropomyosin.
  3. As a result, tropomyosin gets detached from the active site of actin (F actin) filament, exposing the active site for actin.
  4. The myosin head cleaves the ATP to derive energy and gets attached to the uncovered active site of actin. This results into the formation of acto-myosin complex.
  5. The myosin heads are now tilted backwards and pull the attached actin filament inwardly. This results in contraction of the muscle fibres.

Internet my friend. (Textbook Page No. 196)

Question 1.
Collect information about‘T’ tubules of sarcoplasmic reticulum.
Answer:

  1. T tubules or the transverse tubules are invaginations of the sarcolemma penetrating into the myocyte interior, forming a highly branched and interconnected network that makes junctions with the sarcoplasmic reticulum.
  2. These tubules are selectively enriched with specific ion channels and proteins crucial in the development of calcium transients necessary in excitation-contraction coupling, thereby facilitating a fast-synchronous contraction of the entire cell volume.
  3. They are unique to straited muscle cells.
    [Source: https://www. uniprot. org/locations]

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 197)

Question 1.
Explain the chemical changes taking place in muscle contraction.
Answer:
The muscle undergoes various chemical changes during contraction, they are as follows:

  1. A nerve impulse arrives at the motor nerve. The neurotransmitter – acetylcholine is released at the neuromuscular junction (N-M junction or motor endplate) enters into the sarcomere.
  2. This leads to inflow of Na+ inside the sarcomere and generates an action potential in the muscle fibre.
  3. The action potential passes down the T tubules and activates calcium channels in the T tubular membrane. Activation of calcium channel allows calcium ions to pass into the sarcoplasm. These Ca++ ions binds to the specific sites on troponin of actin filaments and a conformational change occurs in the troponin – tropomyosin complex, thereby removing the masking of active sites for myosin on the actin filament.
  4. In the myosin head, the enzyme ATPase gets activated in the presence of Ca++ and converts ATP into ADP and inorganic phosphate.
  5. This energy from ATP hydrolysis is utilized by myosin bridges or myosin heads to bind with active sites of actin and form actomyosin complex pulling the actin filaments towards the centre of sarcomere. The myosin heads are now tilted backwards and pull the attached actin filament inwardly towards them. The actin filament slides over mysosin and contraction occurs.
  6. Also, the ADP needs to be converted back to ATP immediately as they required for muscular contraction, This is achieved in the muscles by the presence of another high energy compound, creatine phosphate.
  7. ADP combines with creatine phosphate to produce ATP and creatinine due to which the supply of ATP for muscle contraction is restored but the level of creatine phosphate keeps decreasing and the level of creatinine keeps on increasing.
  8. The creatinine formed needs to be reconverted to creatine phosphate. This is done by ATP produced during oxidation of glycogen through glycolysis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 2.
Why are muscle rich in creatine phosphate?
Answer:

  1. Creatine phosphate or phosphocreatine is formed from ATP, when the muscle is in relaxed state. It is a phosphorylated form of creatine.
  2. Muscle cells contain creatine phosphate which acts as energy reserve as this high energy compound acts as a phosphate donor for ATP formation.
  3. ATP acts as an immediate source of energy for contraction

Question 3.
Explain the mechanism of muscle contraction and relaxation.
Answer:
Mechanism of muscle contraction:

When the muscles are relaxed, the active sites remain covered with tropomyosin and troponin complex. Due to this, myosin cannot interact with active site of actin and thus contraction cannot occur.

  1. When an impulse (action potential) comes to muscle through motor end plate, it spreads throughout the sarcolemma of the myofibril.
  2. The transverse tubules of sarcoplasmic reticulum release large number of Ca++ ions into sarcoplasm. These calcium ions interact with the troponin molecules and the interaction inactivates troponin-tropomyosin complex. This causes change in the structure of tropomyosin.
  3. As a result, tropomyosin gets detached from the active site of actin (F actin) filament, exposing the active site for actin.
  4. The myosin head cleaves the ATP to derive energy and gets attached to the uncovered active site of actin. This results into the formation of actomyosin complex.
  5. The myosin heads are now tilted backwards and pull the attached actin filament inwardly. This results in contraction of the muscle fibres.

Muscle relaxation: During relaxation, all the events occur in reverse direction as that of muscle contraction.

  1. When the stimulation is terminated, the actomyosin complex is broken down and myosin head gets detached from actin filaments. This process utilizes ATP.
  2. Also, the Ca++ ions are pumped back into the sarcoplasmic reticulum. This process too is an energy dependent process and utilizes ATP.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 24
  3. As a result, the troponin-tropomyosin complex is restored again which covers the active sites of act in filament, due to disappearance of the Ca++ ions. The interaction between actin and myosin ceases and the actin filaments return back to their original position.
  4. This results in muscle relaxation.

Question 4.
What do you understand by muscle twitch?
Answer:
Single muscle twitch:

Single muscle twitch: It is a muscle contraction initiated by a single brief-stimulation. It occurs in 3 stages: a latent period of no contraction, a contraction period and a relaxation period.

  1. The involuntary contraction of muscle fibers is known as muscle twitch.
  2. Muscle twitch is also known as fasciculation.
  3. It is caused due accumulation of lactic acid in muscles.

Do You Know How (Textbook Page No. 198)

Question 1.
Exoskeletal components change from lower to higher group of animals. These include chitinous structures, nails, horns, hooves, scales, hair, shell, plates, fur, muscular foot, tube feet, etc.

Question 1.
Do you know any of these exoskeletal structures help in movement and locomotion?
Answer:
Nails, hooves, scales, plates, muscular foot and tube feet help in movement and locomotion.

Question 2.
How do scales and plates help in movement and locomotion?
Answer:
Scales and plates in reptiles like snakes provide grip to move on rough edgy surfaces.

Question 3.
Are scales of a fish and that of snake similar?
Answer:
Fishes have dermal scales (bony scales), whereas reptiles like snakes have epidermal scales or scutes (horny, tough extensions of outer layer of skin i.e., stratum corneum).

Question 4.
Find out more information about exoskeletal structures and their role in movement and locomotion.
Answer:
Exoskeletal structures: Exoskeleton provide support, help in movement and also provides protection from predators. The exoskeletal structures vary from organism to organism. Echinoderms have tube feet for locomotion whereas molluscs (e.g. Chiton) have muscular foot for movement and locomotion

[Students are expected to find out more information about exoskeletal structures on their own.]

Question 2.
Name the tissues that form the structural framework of the body.
Answer:
Cartilage and bone

Do you remember? (Textbook Page No. 198)

Question 1.
What are the components of skeletal system?
Answer:
The components of skeletal system are bones, tendons, ligaments and joint.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 2.
What type of bones are present in our body?
Answer:
Long bones, short bones, flat bones, irregular bones and sesamoid bones.

Question 3.
How do bones help in various ways?
Answer:

  1. Bones form the framework of our body and thus provide shape to the body.
  2. They protect vital organs thus help in the smooth functioning of body.
  3. The joints between the bones help in movement and locomotion.
  4. They provide firm surface for attachment of muscles.
  5. They are reservoirs of calcium and form important site for hemopoiesis.

Use your brain power. (Textbook Page No. 198)

Question 1.
Can you compare bone, muscle and joint which help in locomotion with any simple machines you have studied earlier?
Answer:
Bone, muscle and joint can be compared to the simple machines called levers. Joints act as fulcrum, respective muscle generates the force required to move the bone associated with joint.

Question 2.
Explain the three types of lever found in human body.
Answer:
The three types of lever are as follows:

  1. Class I lever: The joint between the first vertebra and occipital condyle of skull is an example of Class I lever. The force is directed towards the joints (fulcrum); contraction of back muscle provides force while the part of head that is raised acts as resistance.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 25
  2. Class II lever: Human body raised on toes is an example of Class II lever. Toe acts as fulcrum, contracting calf muscles provide the force while raised body acts as resistance.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 26
  3. Class III lever: Flexion of forearm at elbow exhibit lever of class III. Elbow joint acts as fulcrum and radius, ulna provides resistance. Contracting bicep muscles provides force for the movement.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 27

Use your brain power. (Textbook Page No. 199)

Question 1.
Why are long bones slightly bent and not straight?
Answer:

  1. Long bones include tibia, fibula, femur, humerus, radius, ulna, etc.
  2. They have greater length than width. They consist of a shaft and variable number of epiphysis.
  3. They are slightly bent or curved to absorb the stress of the body’s weight and evenly distribute the body weight at several different points.
  4. If long bones were straight, the weight of the body would be unevenly distributed and the bone would fracture more easily.

Identify and label. (Textbook Page No. 199)

Question 1.
Identify the different bones.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 28

Identify and label. (Textbook Page No. 200)

Question 1.
Name A, B, C and D from the given figure and discuss in group.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 32
Answer:
A – Coronal suture,
B – Sagittal suture,
C – Lambdoidal suture,
D – Lateral / Squamous suture

Skull has many sutures (type of immovable joints) present, out of which four prominent ones are:

  1. Coronal suture: Joins frontal bone with parietals.
  2. Sagittal suture: Joins two parietal bones.
  3. Lambdiodal suture: Joins two parietal bones with occipital bone.
  4. Lateral/squamous sutures: Joins parietal and temporal bones on lateral side.

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 201)

Question 1.
Give schematic plan of human skeleton.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 29

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 30

[Note: Numbers in the bracket indicate the number of bones.]

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 201)

Question 1.
Enlist the bones of cranium.
Answer:
Cranium: It is made up of four median bones and two paired bones.

  1. Frontal bone: It is median bone (unpaired) forming forehead, roof of orbit (eye socket) and the most anterior part of cranium. It is connected to two parietals, sphenoid and ethmoid bone.
  2. Parietal bones: These paired bones form the roof of cranium and greater portion of sides of the cranium.
  3. Temporal bones: These paired bones are situated laterally just above the ear on either side. Each temporal bone gives out zygomatic process that joins zygomatic bone to form zygomatic arch. Just at the base of zygomatic process is mandibular fossa, a depression for mandibles (lower jaw bone) that forms the only movable joint of the skull. This bone harbors the ear canal that directs sound waves into the ear. The processes of temporal bones provide points for attachment for various muscles of neck and tongue.
  4. Occipital bone: It is a single bone present at the back of the head. It forms the posterior part and most of the base of cranium. The inferior part of this bone shows foramen magnum, the opening through which medulla oblongata connects with spinal cord. On the either sides of foramen magnum are two prominent protuberances called occipital condyles. These fit into the corresponding depressions present in 1st vertebra.
  5. Sphenoid bone: Median bone present at the base of the skull that articulates with all other cranial bones and holds them together. This butterfly shaped bone has a saddle shaped region called sella turcica. In this hypophyseal fossa, the pituitary gland is lodged.
  6. Ethmoid bone: This median bone is spongy in appearance. It is located anterior to sphenoid and posterior to nasal bones. It contributes to formation of nasal septum and is major supporting structure of nasal cavity.

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 201)

Question 1.
Write a note on structure and function of skull.
Answer:
i. Structure of skull:
Skull is made up of 22 bones. It is located at the superior end of vertebral column. The bones of skull are joined by fixed or immovable joints except for jaw.

Skull consists of cranium or brain box and facial bones.

i. Cranium: It is made up of four median bones and two paired bones.

  1. Frontal bone: It is median bone (unpaired) forming forehead, roof of orbit (eye socket) and the most anterior part of cranium. It is connected to two parietals, sphenoid and ethmoid bone.
  2. Parietal bones: These paired bones form the roof of cranium and greater portion of sides of the cranium.
  3. Temporal bones: These paired bones are situated laterally just above the ear on either side. Each temporal bone gives out zygomatic process that joins zygomatic bone to form zygomatic arch. Just at the base of zygomatic process is mandibular fossa, a depression for mandibles (lower jaw bone) that forms the only movable joint of the skull. This bone harbors the ear canal that directs sound waves into the ear. The processes of temporal bones provide points for attachment for various muscles of neck and tongue.
  4. Occipital bone: It is a single bone present at the back of the head. It forms the posterior part and most of the base of cranium. The inferior part of this bone shows foramen magnum, the opening through which medulla oblongata connects with spinal cord. On the either sides of foramen magnum are two prominent protuberances called occipital condyles. These fit into the corresponding depressions present in 1st vertebra.
  5. Sphenoid bone: Median bone present at the base of the skull that articulates with all other cranial bones and holds them together. This butterfly shaped bone has a saddle shaped region called sella turcica. In this hypophyseal fossa, the pituitary gland is lodged.
  6. Ethmoid bone: This median bone is spongy in appearance. It is located anterior to sphenoid and posterior to nasal bones. It contributes to formation of nasal septum and is major supporting structure of nasal cavity.

ii. Facial Bones: Fourteen facial bones give a characteristic shape to the face. The growth of face stops of the age of 16.
Following bones comprise the facial bones:

  1. Nasals: These are paired bones that form the bridge of nose.
  2. Maxillae: These form the upper jaw bones. They are paired bones that join with all facial bones except mandible. Upper row of teeth are lodged maxillae.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 33
  3. Palatines: These are paired bones forming the roof of buccal cavity or floor of the nasal cavity.
  4. Zygomatic bones: They are commonly called as cheek bones.
  5. Lacrimal bones: These are the smallest amongst the facial bones. These bones form the medial wall of each orbit. They have lacrimal fossa that houses lacrimal sacs. These sacs gather tears and send them to nasal cavity.
  6. Inferior nasal conchae: They form the part of lateral wall of nasal cavity. They help to swirl and filter air before it passes to lungs.
  7. Vomer: The median, roughly triangular bone that forms the inferior portion of nasal septum.
  8. Mandible: This median bone forms the lower jaw. It is the largest and strongest facial bone. It is the only movable bone of skull. It has curved horizontal body and two perpendicular branches i.e. rami. These help in attachment of muscles. It has lower row of teeth lodged in it.

ii. Functions of skull:

  1. It protects the brain.
  2. It provides sockets for ear, nasal chamber and eyes.
  3. Mandible bone of the skull helps in opening and closing of the mouth.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Internet my friend. (Textbook Page No. 201)

Question 1.
Cleft palate and cleft lip
Answer:

  1. Cleft palate and cleft lip are the birth defects that occur when a baby’s lip or mouth does develop properly.
  2. Cleft palate happens when the tissue that forms the roof of the mouth does not join together completely during pregnancy.
  3. Cleft lip happens when the tissue that makes up the lip does not join completely before birth. This leads to formation of an opening in the upper lip.

[Students are expected to find more information about Cleft Palate and lip on internet.]

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 202)

Question 1.
Why skull is important for us? Enlist few reasons.
Answer:
Functions of skull:

  • It protects the brain.
  • It provides sockets for ear, nasal chamber and eyes.
  • Mandible bone of the skull helps in opening and closing of the mouth.

Internet my friend. (Textbook Page No. 202)

Question 1.
Find out information about sinuses present in skull, functions of skull and disorder ‘sinusitis’.
Answer:
Sinuses are the hollow cavities present in the skull. They humidify the air we breathe.

i. The four types of sinuses present in the skull:

  • Frontal sinuses: They are located above each eye. There are right and left frontal sinuses.
  • Maxillary sinuses: They are the largest among all sinuses, located just behind the cheekbones near to upper jaws.
  • Sphenoid sinuses: These are present just behind the nose.
  • Ethmoid sinuses: These are present between the eyes.

ii. Functions of skull:

Functions of skull:

  • It protects the brain.
  • It provides sockets for ear, nasal chamber and eyes.
  • Mandible bone of the skull helps in opening and closing of the mouth.

iii. Sinusitis: It is the inflammation of tissue lining the sinuses. Healthy sinuses when get blocked with mucus and germs causing infection which may lead to sinusitis.

[Students are expected to find more information about sinusitis, using the internet.]

Something interesting. (Textbook Page No. 202)

Question 1.
If police suspect strangulation, they carefully inspect hyoid bone and cartilage of larynx. These get fractured during strangulation. V arious such investigations are done in case of suspicious death of an individual where ossification of sutures in skull, width of pelvic girdle, etc. are examined to find out approximate age of victim or gender of victim, etc. You may find out information about forensic science.
Answer:
Forensic science is an application of science which is used in the matter of criminal determination and civil law. It is generally used in investigation of crimes. Forensic scientists collect, preserve and analyze the evidence during the course of investigation.
[Students are expected to find more information about forensic science on internet.]

Try this. (Textbook Page No. 202)

Question 1.
Feel your spine (vertebral column). Is it straight or curved?
Answer:
Our spinc shows four slight curves which are visible when viewed from the sides.

Question 2.
Find information about slipped disc. (Textbook page no.202)
Answer:

  1. The bones of vertebral column are supported by the intervertebral discs.
  2. These intervertebral discs act as shock absorbers due to which they are constantly compressed.
  3. The disc consists of two parts – soft gelatinous inner part (nucleus pulposus) and tough outer ring.

If the ligaments of the intervertebral discs become injured, the pressure developed in the nucleus pulposus protrudes posteriorly or into one of the adjacent vertebrae. This is known as slipped disc.

[Students are expected to find more information using the internet.]

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 204)

Question 1.
Write a note on curvatures of vertebral column and mention their importance.
Answer:

  1. The four curvatures in human spine are cervical, lumbar, thoracic and sacral curvatures.
  2. The cervical and lumbar curvatures are secondary and convex whereas the thoracic and sacral curvatures are
    primary and concave.
  3. Importance: Curvatures help in maintaining balance in upright position. They absorb shocks while walking
    and also protect the vertebrae from fracture.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 2.
Explain the structure of typical vertebra.
Answer:

  1. Each vertebra has prominent central body called centrum.
  2. The centra of human vertebrae are flat in anterio-posterior aspect. Thus, human vertebrae are amphiplatyan.
  3. From the either side of the centrum are two thick short processes which unite to form an arch like structure called neural arch, posterior to centrum.
  4. Neural arch forms vertebral foramen which surrounds the spinal cord.
  5. Vertebral foramina of all vertebrae form a continuous ‘neural canal’. Spinal cord along with blood vessels and protective fatty covering passes through neural canal.
  6. The point where two processes of centrum meet, the neural arch is drawn into a spinous process called neural spine.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 35
  7. From the base of neural arch, two articulating processes called zygapophyses are given out on either side. The anterior is called superior zygapophyses and posterior called inferior zygapophyses.
  8. In a stack of vertebrae, inferior zygapophyses of one vertebra articulates with superior zygapophyses of next vertebra. This allows slight movement of vertebrae without allowing them to fall.
  9. At the junction of zygapophyses, a small opening is formed on either side of vertebra called intervertebral foramen that allows passage of spinal nerve.
  10. From the base of neural arch, lateral processes are given out called transverse processes. Neural arch, neural spine and transverse processes are meant for attachment of muscles.

Question 2.
How will you identify a thoracic vertebra?
Answer:
Thoracic vertebrae can be identified on the basis of centrum, as the centrum of the thoracic vertebrae is heart shaped.

Can you recall? (Textbook Page No. 206)

Question 1.
How does humerus form ball and socket joint? Where is it located?
Answer:
The head of humerus fits into the glenoid cavity of scapula and forms ball and socket joint. it is located in shoulder and hips.

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 208)

Question 1.
Differentiate between the skeleton of palm and foot.
Answer:

Skeleton of palm Skeleton of foot
a. It consists of metacarpals and phalanges It consists of metatarsals and phalanges
b. Saddle joints and condyloid joints are in the palm. Condyloid or saddle joints are not present the foot.

Question 2.
Explain the longest bone in human body.
Answer:
Femur: The thigh bone is the longest bone in the body. The head is joined to shaft at an angle by a short neck. It forms ball and socket joint with acetabulum cavity of coxal bone. The lower one third region of shaft is triangular flattened area called popliteal surface. Distal end has two condyles that articulate with tibia and fibula.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 36

Internet my friend. (Textbook Page No. 212)

Question 1.
Find out information about types of fractures and how they heal.
Answer:

  1. Fractures are classified based on their severity, shape or position of the fracture line or the physician who first described them.
  2. Types of fractures:
    1. Open fractures: The broken ends of the bone protrude through skin.
    2. Comminuted fractures: The bone is splintered, crushed or broken into pieces at the site of impact and smaller bone fragments lie between the two main fragments.
    3. Greenstick fractures: A partial fracture in which one side of the bone is broken and the other side bends.
    4. Impacted fractures: One end of the fractured bone is forcefully driven into the inferior of the other.
    5. Pott fractures: Fracture of the distal end lateral leg bone with serious injury of the distal tibial articulation.
    6. Codes fractures: Fracture of the distal end of the lateral forearm in which the distal fragment is displaced posteriorly.
  3. A fractured bone heals in four phases viz, reactive phase, fibrocartilaginous formation phase, bony callus formation phase and bone remodeling phase.

[Source: Tortora, G., Derrickson, B. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. 15th Edition]

[Students are expected to find out more information about healing of fractures using the internet.]

Do you remember? (Textbook Page No. 208)

Question 1.
What are joints? What are the types?
Answer:
i. A point where two or more bones get articulated is called joint or articulation or athrosis.
They are classified based on degree of flexibility or movement they permit into lastly synovial or freely movable or diarthroses type of joints.

ii. Synarthroses / fibrous joints / movable joints:
In this joint, the articulating bones are held together by means of fibrous connective tissue. Bones do not exhibit movement. Hence, it is immovable or fixed type of joint. Synarthroses are further classified into sutures, syndesmoses and gomphoses.

  • Sutures: It is composed of thin layer of a dense fibrous connective tissue. Sutures are places of growth. They remain open till growth is complete. On completion of growth, they tend to ossify. Sutures may permit some moulding during childhood. Sutures are further classified into butt joint, scarf joint, lap joint and serrate joint.
  • Syndesmoses: It is present where there is greater distance between articulating bones. At such locations, fibrous connective tissue is arranged as a sheet or bundle, e.g. Distal tibiofibular joint, interosseous membrane between tibia and fibula and that between radius and ulna.
  • Gomphoses: In this type of joint, a cone shaped bone fits into a socket provided by other bone,
    e. g. Tooth and jaw bones.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 37

iii. Cartilaginous / slightly movable joints / amphiarthroses:
These joints are neither fixed nor freely movable. Articulating bones are held together by hyaline or
fibrocartilages. They are further classified as

  • Synchondroses: The two bones are held together by hyaline cartilage. They are meant for growth.
    On completion of growth, the joint gets ossified, e.g. Epiphyseal plate found between epiphysis and diaphysis of a long bone, Rib – Sternum junction.
  • Symphysis: In this type of joint, broad flat disc of fibrocartilage connects two bones. It occurs in mid-line of the body. e.g. Intervertebral discs, manubrium and sternum, pubic symphysis.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 38

iv. Synovial joints / freely movable joints / diarthroses:

  1. It is characterized by presence of a space called synovial cavity between articulating bones that renders free movement at the joint.
  2. The articulating surfaces of bones at a synovial joint are covered by a layer of hyaline cartilage. It reduces friction during movement and helps to absorb shock.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 39
  3. Synovial cavity is lined by synovial membrane that forms synovial capsule. Synovial membrane secretes synovial fluid.
  4. Synovial fluid is a clear, viscous, straw coloured fluid similar to lymph. It is viscous due to hyaluronic acid. The synovial fluid also contains nutrients, mucous and phagocytic cells to remove microbes. Synovial fluid lubricates the joint, absorbs shocks, nourishes the hyaline cartilage and removes waste materials from hyaline cartilage cells (as cartilage is avascular). Phagocytic cells destroy microbes and cellular debris formed by wear and tear of the joint.
  5. If the joint is immobile for a while, the synovial fluid becomes viscous and as joint movement starts, it becomes less viscous.
  6. The joint is provided with capsular ligament and numerous accessory ligaments. The fibrous capsule is attached to periosteum of articulating bones. The ligament helps in avoiding dislocation of joint.

g. The types of synovial joints are on follows:

1. Pivot joint: In this type of joint, the rounded or pointed surface of one bone articulates with a ring formed partly by another bone and partly by the ligament. Rotation only around its own longitudinal axis is possible. e.g. in joint between atlas and axis vertebrae, head turns side ways to form ‘NO’ joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 40

2. BaIl and socket joint: The ball like surface of one bone fits into cup like depression of another bone forming a movable joint. Multi-axial movements are possible. This type of joint allows movements along all three axes and in all directions. e.g. Shoulder and hip joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 41

3. Hinge joint: In a hinge joint, convex surface of one bone fits into concave surface of another bone. In most hinge joints one bone remains stationary and other moves. The angular opening and closing motion (like hinge) is possible. In this joint only mono-axial movement takes place like flexion and extension. e.g. Elbow and knee joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 42

4. Condyloid joint: It is an ellipsoid joint. The convex oval shaped projection of one bone fits into oval shaped depression in another bone. It is a biaxial joint because it permits movement along two axes viz, flexion, extension, abduction, adduction and circumduction is possible. e.g. Metacarpophalangeal joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 43

5. Gliding joint: It is a planar joint, where the articulating surfaces of bones are flat or slightly curved. These joints are non-axial because the motion they allow does not occur along an axis or a plane. e.g. Intercarpal and intertarsal joints.

Saddle joint: This joint is a characteristic of Homo sapiens. Here the articular surface of one bone is saddle-shaped and that of other bone fits into saddle (each bone forming this joint have both concave and convex areas). It is a modified condyloid joint in which movement is somewhat more free. It is a biaxial joint that allows flexion, extension, abduction, adduction and circumduction. e.g. Carpometacarpellar joint between carpal (trapezium) and metacarpal of thumb.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 44

Imagine. (Textbook Page No. 208)

Question 1.
If your elbow joint would be a fixed type of joint and joint between teeth and gum would be freely movable.
Answer:

  1. If the elbow joint would be fixed the flexion and extension of the forearm won’t be possible. Also, rotation of the forearm and wrist would not be not possible.
  2. Gomphoses is the type of joint that holds the teeth in the jaw bone. If this joint would be freely movable, we would not be able to chew and all our teeth would fall out.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Use your brain power. (Textbook Page No. 210)

Question 1.
Why are warming up rounds essential before regular exercise?
Answer:

  1. Warming up before exercise stimulates the production and secretion of synovial fluid which reduces the stress on joints during exercise.
  2. Also, if a joint is immobile for a while, the synovial fluid becomes viscous and as joint movement starts, it becomes less viscous.
  3. Warming up increases the blood circulation, loosening the joints and increasing the blood flow. It also prepares the muscles for physical activity and prevents injuries.

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 211)

Question 1.
Classify various types of joints found in human body. Present the information in the form of chart. Give example of each type.
Answer:

i. A point where two or more bones get articulated is called joint or articulation or athrosis.
They are classified based on degree of flexibility or movement they permit into lastly synovial or freely movable or diarthroses type of joints.

ii. Synarthroses / fibrous joints / movable joints:
In this joint, the articulating bones are held together by means of fibrous connective tissue. Bones do not exhibit movement. Hence, it is immovable or fixed type of joint. Synarthroses are further classified into sutures, syndesmoses and gomphoses.

  1. Sutures: It is composed of thin layer of a dense fibrous connective tissue. Sutures are places of growth. They remain open till growth is complete. On completion of growth, they tend to ossify. Sutures may permit some moulding during childhood. Sutures are further classified into butt joint, scarf joint, lap joint and serrate joint.
  2. Syndesmoses: It is present where there is greater distance between articulating bones. At such locations, fibrous connective tissue is arranged as a sheet or bundle, e.g. Distal tibiofibular joint, interosseous membrane between tibia and fibula and that between radius and ulna.
  3. Gomphoses: In this type of joint, a cone shaped bone fits into a socket provided by other bone,
    e. g. Tooth and jaw bones.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 37

iii. Cartilaginous / slightly movable joints / amphiarthroses:
These joints are neither fixed nor freely movable. Articulating bones are held together by hyaline or
fibrocartilages. They are further classified as

  • Synchondroses: The two bones are held together by hyaline cartilage. They are meant for growth.
    On completion of growth, the joint gets ossified, e.g. Epiphyseal plate found between epiphysis and diaphysis of a long bone, Rib – Sternum junction.
  • Symphysis: In this type of joint, broad flat disc of fibrocartilage connects two bones. It occurs in mid-line of the body. e.g. Intervertebral discs, manubrium and sternum, pubic symphysis.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 38

iv. Synovial joints / freely movable joints / diarthroses:

  1. It is characterized by presence of a space called synovial cavity between articulating bones that renders free movement at the joint.
  2. The articulating surfaces of bones at a synovial joint are covered by a layer of hyaline cartilage. It reduces friction during movement and helps to absorb shock.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 39
  3. Synovial cavity is lined by synovial membrane that forms synovial capsule. Synovial membrane secretes synovial fluid.
  4. Synovial fluid is a clear, viscous, straw coloured fluid similar to lymph. It is viscous due to hyaluronic acid. The synovial fluid also contains nutrients, mucous and phagocytic cells to remove microbes.
    Synovial fluid lubricates the joint, absorbs shocks, nourishes the hyaline cartilage and removes waste materials from hyaline cartilage cells (as cartilage is avascular). Phagocytic cells destroy microbes and cellular debris formed by wear and tear of the joint.
  5. If the joint is immobile for a while, the synovial fluid becomes viscous and as joint movement starts, it becomes less viscous.
  6. The joint is provided with capsular ligament and numerous accessory ligaments. The fibrous capsule is attached to periosteum of articulating bones. The ligament helps in avoiding dislocation of joint.

g. The types of synovial joints are on follows:

1. Pivot joint: In this type of joint, the rounded or pointed surface of one bone articulates with a ring formed partly by another bone and partly by the ligament. Rotation only around its own longitudinal axis is possible. e.g. in joint between atlas and axis vertebrae, head turns side ways to form ‘NO’ joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 40

2. BaIl and socket joint: The ball like surface of one bone fits into cup like depression of another bone forming a movable joint. Multi-axial movements are possible. This type of joint allows movements along all three axes and in all directions. e.g. Shoulder and hip joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 41

3. Hinge joint: In a hinge joint, convex surface of one bone fits into concave surface of another bone. In most hinge joints one bone remains stationary and other moves. The angular opening and closing motion (like hinge) is possible. In this joint only mono-axial movement takes place like flexion and extension. e.g. Elbow and knee joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 42

4. Condyloid joint: It is an ellipsoid joint. The convex oval shaped projection of one bone fits into oval shaped depression in another bone. It is a biaxial joint because it permits movement along two axes viz, flexion, extension, abduction, adduction and circumduction is possible. e.g. Metacarpophalangeal joint.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 43

5. Gliding joint: It is a planar joint, where the articulating surfaces of bones are flat or slightly curved. These joints are non-axial because the motion they allow does not occur along an axis or a plane. e.g. Intercarpal and intertarsal joints.

Saddle joint: This joint is a characteristic of Homo sapiens. Here the articular surface of one bone is saddle-shaped and that of other bone fits into saddle (each bone forming this joint have both concave and convex areas). It is a modified condyloid joint in which movement is somewhat more free. It is a biaxial joint that allows flexion, extension, abduction, adduction and circumduction. e.g. Carpometacarpellar joint between carpal (trapezium) and metacarpal of thumb.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Solutions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 44

[Students are expected to prepare a chart on their own.]

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 211)

Question 1.
Human beings can hold an object in a better manner than monkeys. Why?
Answer:

  1. Humans and monkeys both have five fingers including thumb, however humans can hold an object in better manner than monkeys because humans have highly developed opposable thumbs. The opposable thumb allows better grip.
  2. The saddle joint in thumb allows free and independent movement to the thumb the carpometacarpellar joint between carpal (trapezium) and metacarpal of thumb makes the thumb opposable. It allows biaxial movements, i.e. flexion – extension and adduction – abduction but not rotation.

[Note: Gorillas, chimpanzees, orangutans and some other variants of apes have opposable thumb.]

Internet my friend. (Textbook Page No. 211)

Question 92.
Now a days we hear from many elderly people that they are undergoing knee replacement surgery. Find out why one has to undergo knee replacement; how it is carried out and how it can be prevented.
Answer:
Knee replacement is done in following cases:

  1. Osteoarthritis: The cartilage in the knee undergoes degradation. It is caused by many factors such as muscle weakness, aging, obesity, etc.
  2. Rheumatoid arthritis: It is characterised by inflammation of the synovial membrane, where it starts secreting excess of synovial fluid in the joint. This fluid exerts extensive pressure on the joint and causes severe pain.
  3. Post-traumatic arthritis: This is caused due to breakage of ligament or cartilage. The breakage can be due to severe injury or accident. It causes severe pain and requires knee replacement.
  4. Procedure:
    The procedure involves removal of the damaged cartilage or ligament and replaces it with artificial implant made up of either metal, plastic or both. Metal or plastic knee caps are used to cover the knees. The implant is connected to the bone and an artificial knee joint is made between them.
  5. Prevention: Maintaining body weight, exercising regularly, consuming appropriate medications and supplements, etc.

[Students are expected to find out more information about knee replacement on internet]

Find out. (Textbook Page No. 212)

Question 1.
You must have heard of Sachin Tendulkar suffering from ‘tennis elbow’, a cricketer suffering from a disorder named after another game. Can common people too suffer from this disorder? Find out more information about this disorder.
Answer:

  1. Tennis elbow is caused due to inflammation of tendon which joins muscles of forearm to the bone of upper arm (humerus). It is known as lateral epicondylitis.
  2. It causes severe pain in the elbow. It occurs due to extensive repetitive movement of hand. This damages the tendon and increases the tenderness of the elbow joint.
  3. This disorder develops not only in athletes but also in other common people whose job involves extensive movement of hand such as carpenter, painter, plumber, etc.

[Students are expected to find more information about tennis elbow on their own.]

11th Std Biology Questions And Answers:

11th Physics Chapter 7 Exercise Thermal Properties of Matter Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 7

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Thermal Properties of Matter Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 7 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 7 Exercise Solutions 

1. Choose the correct option.

Question 1.
Range of temperature in a clinical thermometer, which measures the temperature of human body, is
(A) 70 ºC to 100 ºC
(B) 34 ºC to 42 ºC
(C) 0 ºF to 100 ºF
(D) 34 ºF to 80 ºF
Answer:
(B) 34 ºC to 42 ºC

Question 2.
A glass bottle completely filled with water is kept in the freezer. Why does it crack?
(A) Bottle gets contracted
(B) Bottle is expanded
(C) Water expands on freezing
(D) Water contracts on freezing
Answer:
(C) Water expands on freezing

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
If two temperatures differ by 25 °C on Celsius scale, the difference in temperature on Fahrenheit scale is
(A) 65°
(B) 45°
(C) 38°
(D) 25°
Answer:
(B) 45°

Question 4.
If α, β and γ are coefficients of linear, area l and volume expansion of a solid then
(A) α: β:γ 1:3:2
(B) α:β:γ 1:2:3
(C) α:β:γ 2:3:1
(D) α:β:γ 3:1:2
Answer:
(B) α:β:γ 1:2:3

Question 5.
Consider the following statements-
(I) The coefficient of linear expansion has dimension K-1
(II) The coefficient of volume expansion has dimension K-1
(A) I and II are both correct
(B) I is correct but II is wrong
(C) II is correct but I is wrong
(D) I and II are both wrong
Answer:
(A) I and II are both correct

Question 6.
Water falls from a height of 200 m. What is the difference in temperature between the water at the top and bottom of a water fall given that specific heat of water is 4200 J kg-1 °C-1?
(A) 0.96 °C
(B) 1.02 °C
(C) 0.46 °C
(D) 1.16 °C
Answer:
(C) 0.46 °C

2. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Clearly state the difference between heat and temperature?
Answer:

Heat Temperature
i. Heat is energy in transit. When two bodies at different temperatures are brought in contact, they exchange heat.
OR
Heat is the form of energy transferred between two (or more) systems or a system and its surroundings by virtue of their temperature difference.
Temperature is a physical quantity that defines the thermodynamic state of a system.
OR
Heat transfer takes place between the body and the surrounding medium until the body and the surrounding medium are at the same temperature.
ii. Heat exchange can be measured with the help of a calorimeter. Temperature is measured with the help of a thermometer.
iii. Heat (being a form of energy) is a derived quantity. Temperature is a fundamental quantity.

Question 2.
How a thermometer is calibrated?
Answer:

  1. For the calibration of a thermometer, a standard temperature interval is selected between two easily reproducible fixed temperatures.
  2. The fact that substances change state from solid to liquid to gas at fixed temperatures is used to define reference temperature called fixed point.
  3. The two fixed temperatures selected for this purpose are the melting point of ice or freezing point of water and the boiling point of water.
  4. This standard temperature interval is divided into sub-intervals by utilizing some physical property that changes with temperature.
  5. Each sub-interval is called as a degree of temperature. Thus, an empirical scale for temperature is set up.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
What are different scales of temperature? What is the relation between them?
Answer:

  1. Celsius scale:
    • The ice point (melting point of pure ice) is marked as O °C (lower point) and steam point (boiling point of water) is marked as 100 °C (higher point).
    • Both are taken at one atmospheric pressure.
    • The interval between these points is divided into two equal parts. Each of these parts is called as one degree celsius and it is ‘written as 1 °C.
  2. Fahrenheit scale:
    • The ice point (melting point of pure ice) is marked as 32 °F and steam point (boiling point of water) is marked as 212 °F.
    • The interval between these two reference points is divided into 180 equal parts. Each part is called as degree fahrenheit and is written as 1 °F.
  3. Kelvin scale:
    • The temperature scale that has its zero at -273.15 °C and temperature intervals are same as that on the Celsius scale is called as kelvin scale or absolute scale.
    • The absolute temperature, T and celsius temperature, TC are related as, T = TC + 273.15
      eg.: when TC = 27 °C,
      T = 27+273.15 K = 300.15 K

Relation between different scales of temperature:
\(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{F}}-32}{180}=\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{C}}-0}{100}=\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{K}}-273.15}{100}\)
where,
TF = temperature in fahrenheit scale,
TC = temperature in celsius scale,
TK = temperature in kelvin scale,
[Note: At zero of the kelvin scale, every substance in nature has the least possible activity.]

Question 4.
What is absolute zero?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 1

  1. When the graph of pressure (P) against temperature T (°C) at constant volume for three ideal gases A, B and C is plotted, in each case, P -T graph is straight line indicating direct proportion between them. The slopes of these graphs are different.
  2. The individual straight lines intersect the pressure axis at different values of pressure at O °C. but each line intersects the temperature axis at the same point, i.e., at absolute temperature (-273.15 °C).
  3. Similarly graph at constant pressure for three different ideal gases A, B and C extrapolate to the same temperature intercept -273.15 °C i.e., absolute zero temperature.
  4. It is seen that all the lines for different gases Cut the temperature axis at the same point at -273.15 °C.
  5. This point is termed as the absolute zero of temperature.
  6. It is not possible to attain a temperature lower than this value. Even to achieve absolute zero temperature is not possible in practice.
    [Note: The point of zero pressure or zero volume does not depend on am specific gas.]

Question 5.
Derive the relation between three coefficients of thermal expansion.
Answer:
Consider a square plate of side l0 at 0 °C and h at T °C.

  1. lT = l0 (1 + αT)
    If area of plate at 0 °C is A0, A0 = \(l_{0}^{2}\)
    If area of plate at T °C is AT,
    AT = \(l_{\mathrm{T}}^{2}=l_{0}^{2}\) (1 + αT)2
    or AT = A0 (1 + αT)2 …………… (1)
    Also,
    AT = A0(1 + βT)2 …………… (2)
    ……………. [∵ β = \(\frac{\mathrm{A}_{\mathrm{T}}-\mathrm{A}_{0}}{\mathrm{~A}_{0}\left(\mathrm{~T}-\mathrm{T}_{0}\right)}\)]
  2. Using Equations (1) and (2),
    A0 (1 + αT)2 = A0(1 + βT)
    ∴ 1 + 2αT + α2T2 = 1 + βT
  3. Since the values of a are very small, the term α2T2 is very small and may be neglected,
    ∴ β = 2a
  4. The result is general because any solid can be regarded as a collection of small squares.

Relation between coefficient of linear expansion (α) and coefficient of cubical expansion (γ).

  1. Consider a cube of side l0 at 0 °C and lT at T °C.
    ∴ lT = l0(1 + αT)
    If volume of the cube at 0 °C is V0, V0 = \(l_{0}^{3}\)
    If volume of the cube at T °C is
    VT, VT = \(l_{\mathrm{T}}^{3}=l_{0}^{3}\) (1 + αT)3
    VT = V0 (1 + αT)3 ………. (1)
    Also,
    VT = V0(1 + γT) …………. (2)
    …………. [∵ γ = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{T}}-\mathrm{V}_{0}}{\mathrm{~V}_{0}\left(\mathrm{~T}-\mathrm{T}_{0}\right)}\)]
  2. Using Equations (1) and (2),
    V0(1 + αT)3 = V0(1 + γT)
    ∴ 1 + 3αT + 3α2T2 + α3T3 = 1 + γT
  3. Since the values of a are very small, the terms with higher powers of a may be neglected,
    ∴ γ = 3α
  4. The result is general because any solid can be regarded as a collection of small cubes.

Relation between α, β and γ is given by,
α = \(\frac{\beta}{2}=\frac{\gamma}{3}\)
where, α = coefficient of linear expansion.
β = coefficient of superficial expansion,
γ = coefficient of cubical expansion.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 6.
State applications of thermal expansion.
Answer:
Applications of thermal expansion:

  • The steel wheel is heated to expand. This expanded wheel can easily fit over axle. The wheel is then cooled quickly. Upon cooling, wheel contracts and fits tightly upon the axle.
  • An electric light bulb gets hot quickly when in use. The wire leads to the filament are sealed into the glass. 1f the glass of the bulbs has significantly different thermal expansivity from the wire leads, the glass and the wire would separate, breaking down the vacuum. To prevent this, wires are made of platinum or some suitable alloy with the same expansivity as ordinary glass.

Question 7.
Why do we generally consider two specific heats for a gas?
Answer:

  • A slight change in temperature causes considerable change in pressure as well as volume of the gas.
  • Therefore, two principal specific heats are defined for a gas viz., specific heat capacity at constant volume (SV) and specific heat capacity at constant pressure (Sp).

Question 8.
Are freezing point and melting point same with respect to change of state ? Comment.
Answer:
Though freezing point and melting point mark same temperature (0°C or 32° F), state of change is different for the two points. At freezing point liquid gets converted into solid, whereas at melting point solid gets converted into its liquid state.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 9.
Define
(i) Sublimation
(ii) Triple point.
Answer:

  1. The change from solid state to vapour stale without passing through the liquid state is called sublimation and the substance is said to sublime.
    Examples: Dry ice (solid CO2) and iodine.
  2. The triple point of water is that point where water in a solid, liquid and gas state co-exists in equilibrium and this occurs only at a unique temperature and a pressure.

Question 10.
Explain the term ‘steady state’.
Answer:

  1. When one end of a metal rod is heated, the heat flows by conduction from hot end to the cold end.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 5
  2. As a result, the temperature of every section of the rod starts increasing.
  3. Under this condition, the rod is said to be in a variable temperature state.
  4. After some time, the temperature at each section of the rod becomes steady i.e., does not change.
  5. Temperature of each cross-section of the rod now becomes constant though not the same. This is called steady state condition.

Question 11.
Define coefficient of thermal conductivity. Derive its expression.
Answer:
Coefficient of thermal conductivity of a material is defined as the quantity of heat that flows in one second between the opposite faces of a cube of side 1 m, the faces being kept at a temperature difference of 1°C (or 1 K).

Expression for coefficient of thermal conductivity:

  1. Under steady state condition, the quantity of heat ‘Q’ that flows from the hot face at temperature T1 to the cold face at temperature T2 of a cube with side x and area of cross- section A is
    • directly proportional to the cross-sectional area A of the face. i.e.. Q ∝ A
    • directly proportional to the temperature difference between the two faces i.e., Q ∝ (T1 – T2)
    • directly proportional to time t (in seconds) for which heat flows i.e.. Q ∝ t
    • inversely proportional to the perpendicular distance x between hot and cold faces i.e., Q ∝ 1/x
  2. Combining the above four factors, we have the quantity of heat
    Q ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{A}\left(\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}\right) \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{x}}\)
    ∴ Q = \(\)
    where k is a constant of proportionality and is called coefficient of thermal conductivity. Its value depends upon the nature of the material.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 12.
Give any four applications of thermal conductivity in every day life.
Answer:
Answer: Applications of thermal conductivity:

    • Thick walls are used in the construction of cold storage rooms.
    • Brick being a bad conductor of heat is used to reduce the flow of heat from the surroundings to the rooms.
    • Better heat insulation is obtained by using hollow bricks.
    • Air being a poorer conductor than a brick, it further avoids the conduction of heat from outside.
  1. Street vendors keep ice blocks packed in saw dust to prevent them from melting rapidly.
  2. The handle of a cooking utensil is made of a bad conductor of heat, such as ebonite, to protect our hand from the hot utensil.
  3. Two bedsheets used together to cover the body help retain body heat better than a single bedsheet of double the thickness. Trapped air being a bad conductor of heat, the layer of air between the two sheets reduces thermal conduction better than a sheet of double the thickness. Similarly, a blanket coupled with a bedsheet is a cheaper alternative to using two blankets.

Question 13.
Explain the term thermal resistance. State its SI unit and dimensions.
Answer:

  1. Consider expression for conduction rate,
    Pcond = kA \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}\right)}{\mathrm{x}}\)
    ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}}{\mathrm{P}_{\text {cond }}}=\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{kA}}\) ……………. (1)
  2. Ratio \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}}{\mathrm{P}_{\text {cond }}}\) is called as thermal resistance (RT) of material.

The SI unit of thermal resistance is °C s/kcal or °C s/J and its dimensional formula is [L-2M-1T3K1].

Question 14.
How heat transfer occurs through radiation in absence of a medium?
Answer:

  1. All objects possess thermal energy due to their temperature T(T > 0 K).
  2. The rapidly moving molecules of a hot body emit EM waves travelling with the velocity of light. These are called thermal radiations.
  3. These carry energy with them and transfer it to the low-speed molecules of a cold body on which they fall.
  4. This results in an increase in the molecular motion of the cold body and its temperature rises.
  5. Thus transfer of heat by radiation is a two fold process-the conversion of thermal energy into waves and reconversion of waves into thermal energy by the body on which they fall.

Question 15.
State Newton’s law of cooling and explain how it can be experimentally verified.
Answer:
The rate of loss of heat dT/dt of the both’ is directly proportional to the difference of temperature (T – T0) of the body and the surroundings provided the difference in temperatures is small.

Mathematically, Newton’s law of cooling can be expressed as:
\(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ∝ (T – T0)
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ∝ C(T – T0)
where, C is constant of proportionality. Experimental verification of Newton’s law of cooling:

  1. Fill a calorimeter upto \(\frac{2}{3}\) of its capacity with a boiling water. Cover it with lid with a hole for passing the thermometer.
  2. Insert the thermometer through the hole and adjust it so that the bulb of the thermometer is fully immersed in hot water.
  3. Keep calorimeter vessel in constant temperature enclosure or just in open air since room temperature will not change much during the experiment.
  4. Note down the temperature (T) on the thermometer at every one minute interval until the temperature of water decreases by about 25 °C.
  5. Plot a graph of temperature (T) on Y-axis against time (t) on X-axis. This graph is called cooling curve as shown in figure (a).
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 7
  6. Draw tangents to the curve at suitable points on the curve. The slope of each tangent is \(\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) and gives the rate of fall of temperature at that temperature (T).
  7. Now the graph of \(\left|\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right|\) on Y-axis against (T – T0) on X-axis is plotted with (0, 0) origin. The graph is straight line and passes through origin as shown in figure (b), which verities Newton’s law of cooling.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 8
    (b) Graphical verification of Newton’s law of cooling

Question 16.
What is thermal stress? Give an example of disadvantages of thermal stress in practical use?
Answer:

  1. Consider a metallic rod of length l0 fixed between two rigid supports at T °C.
    If the temperature of rod is increased by ∆T, length of rod would become,
    l = l0(1 + α∆T)
    Where, α is the coefficient of linear expansion of material of the rod.
    But the supports prevent expansion of rod. As a result, rod exerts stress on the supports. Such stress is termed as thermal stress.
  2. Disadvantage: Thermal stress can lead to fracture or deformation in substance under certain conditions.
  3. Railway tracks are made up of metals which expand upon heating. If no gap is kept between tracks, in hot weather, expansion of metal tracks may exert thermal stress on track. This may lead to bending of tracks which would be dangerous. Hence, railway track is not a continuous piece but is made up of segments separated by gaps.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 17.
Which materials can be used as thermal insulators and why?
Answer:

  1. Substances such as glass, wood, rubber, plastic, etc. can be used as thermal insulators.
  2. These substances do not have free electrons to conduct heat freely throughout the body. Hence, they arc poor conductors of heat.

3. Solve the following problems.

Question 1.
A glass flask has volume 1 × 10-4 m3. It is filled with a liquid at 30 ºC. If the temperature of the system is raised to 100 ºC, how much of the liquid will overflow. (Coefficient of volume expansion of glass is 1.2 × 10-5 (ºC)-1 while that of the liquid is 75 × 10-5 ºC-1)
Solution:
Given: V1 = 1 × 10-4 m3 = 10-4 m3, T1 = 30°C,
T2 = 100 °C
To find: Volume of liquid that overflows
Formula: γ = \(\frac{V_{2}-V_{1}}{V_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Increase is volume = V2 – V1
= γV1(T2 – T1)
increase in volume of beaker
= γglass × V1 (T2 – T1)
= 1.2 × 10-5 × 10-4 × (100 – 30)
= 1.2 × 70 × 10-9
= 4 × 10-9 m3
∴ Increase in volume of beaker
= 84 × 10-9 m3
Increase in volume of liquid
= γliquid × V1 (T2 – T1)
= 75 × 10-5 × 10 × (100 – 30)
= 75 × 70 × 10
= 5250 × 10-9 m3
∴ Increase in volume of liquid = 5250 × 10-9 m3
∴ Volume of liquid which overflows
= (5250 – 84) × 10-9 m3
= 5166 × 10-9 m3
= 0.5166 × 10-7 m3
Volume of liquid that overflows is 0.5166 × 10-7 m3.
[Note: The answer given above is presented considering standard conventions of writing number with its correct order of magnitude.]

Question 2.
Which will require more energy, heating a 2.0 kg block of lead by 30 K or heating a 4.0 kg block of copper by 5 K? (slead = 128 J kg-1 K-1, scopper = 387 J kg-1 K-1)
Solution:
Given: mlead = 2 kg, ∆Tlead = 30 K,
slead = 128 J/kg K,
mCu =4 kg, ∆TCu = 5 K,
sCu = 387 J/kg K
To find: Substance requiring more heat energy.
Formula: Q = ms ∆T
Calculation: From formula,
For lead, Qlead = 2 × 128 × 30 = 7680J
For Copper, QCu = 4 × 387 × 5 = 7740 J
QCu > Qlead, copper will require more heat energy.
Copper will require more heat energy.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
Specific latent heat of vaporization of water is 2.26 × 106 J/kg. Calculate the energy needed to change 5.0 g of water into steam at 100 ºC.
Solution:
Given: Lvap = 2.26 × 106 J/kg
m = 5g = 5 × 10-3 kg
In this case, no temperature change takes place only change of state occurs.
To find: Heat required to convert water into steam.
Formula: Heat required = mLvap
Calculation: From formula,
Heat required = 5 × 10-3 × 2.26 × 106
= 11300J
= 1.13 × 104 J
Heat required to convert water into steam is 1.13 × 104 J
[Note: The answer given above is presented considering standard conventions of writing number with its correct order of magnitude.]

Question 4.
A metal sphere cools at the rate of 0.05 ºC/s when its temperature is 70ºC and at the rate of 0.025 ºC/s when its temperature is 50 ºC. Determine the temperature of the surroundings and find the rate of cooling when the temperature of the metal sphere is 40 ºC.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 10
∴ 2(50 – T0) = 70 – T0
∴ T0 = 30 πC
Substituting value of T0.
0.05 = C (70 – 30)
∴ C = \(\frac{0.05}{40}\) = 0.00125/s.
For T3 = 40 °C
\(\left(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)_{3}\) = C(T3 – T0)
= 0.00125 (40 – 30)
= 0.00125 × 10
= 0.0125°C/s.
i) Temperature of surrounding is 30 °C.
ii) Rate of cooling at 40 °C is 0.0125 °C/s.

Question 5.
The volume of a gas varied linearly with absolute temperature if its pressure is held constant. Suppose the gas does not liquefy even at very low temperatures, at what temperature the volume of the gas will be ideally zero?
Answer:
At temperature of -273.15 °C, the volume of the gas will be ideally zero.

Question 6.
In olden days, while laying the rails for trains, small gaps used to be left between the rail sections to allow for thermal expansion. Suppose the rails are laid at room temperature 27 ºC. If maximum temperature in the region is 45 ºC and the length of each rail section is 10 m, what should be the gap left given that α = 1.2 × 10-5 K-1 for the material of the rail section?
Solution:
Given. T1 = 27 °C, T2 = 45 °C,
L1 = 10m.
α = 1.2 × 10-5 K-1
To find: Gap that should be left (L2 – L1)
Formula: L2 – L1 = L1 α(T2 – T1)
Calculation: From formula,
L2 – L1 = 10 × 1.2 × 10-5 × (45 – 27)
= 2.16 × 10-3 m
= 2.16 mm
The gap that should be left between rail sections is 2.16 mm.

Question 7.
A blacksmith fixes iron ring on the rim of the wooden wheel of a bullock cart. The diameter of the wooden rim and the iron ring are 1.5 m and 1.47 m respectively at room temperature of 27 ºC. To what temperature the iron ring should be heated so that it can fit the rim of the wheel (αiron = 1.2 × 10-5 K-1).
Solution:
Given: dw = 1.5 m, d = 1.47 m, T1 = 27 °C.
αi = 1.2 × 10-5/ K
To find: Temperature (T2)
Formula. α = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{w}}-\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{i}}}{\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{i}}\left(\mathrm{T}_{2}-\mathrm{T}_{1}\right)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
T2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{w}}-\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{i}}}{\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{i}} \alpha}\) + T1
= \(\frac{1.5-1.47}{1.47 \times 1.2 \times 10^{-5}}\) + 27
= 1700.7 + 27
= 1727.7 °C
Iron ring should be heated to temperature of 1727.7 °C.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 8.
In a random temperature scale X, water boils at 200 °X and freezes at 20 °X. Find the boiling point of a liquid in this scale if it boils at 62 °C.
Solution:
Here thermometric property P is temperature at some random scale X.
Using equation,
T = \(\frac{100\left(P_{T}-P_{1}\right)}{\left(P_{2}-P_{1}\right)}\)
For P1 = 20 °X,
P2 = 200 °X,
T = 62°C
∴ 62 = \(\frac{100\left(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{T}}-20\right)}{(200-20)}\)
∴ PT = \(\frac{62 \times(200-20)}{100}\) + 20 = 111.6 + 20
= 131.6 °X
The boiling point of a liquid in this scale is 131.6 °X.

Question 9.
A gas at 900°C is cooled until both its pressure and volume are halved. Calculate its final temperature.
Solution:
Given: T1 = 900 °C = 900 + 273.15 = 1173.15 K
V2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{1}}{2}\), P2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1}}{2}\)
To find: Final temperature (T2)
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{\mathrm{I}}}=\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2} \mathrm{~V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula.
\(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{1173.15}=\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{\mathrm{l}}}{4 \mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
∴ T2 = \(\frac{1173.15}{4}\) = 293.29 K
Final temperature of gas is 293.29 K.

Question 10.
An aluminium rod and iron rod show 1.5 m difference in their lengths when heated at all temperature. What are their lengths at 0 °C if coefficient of linear expansion for aluminium is 24.5 × 10-6 /°C and for iron is 11.9 × 10-6 /°C
Solution:
Given: (LT)i – (LT)al = 1.5 m, T0 = 0 °C
αal = 24.5 × 10-6/°C
αi = 11.9 × 10-6 /°C
To find: Lengths of aluminium and iron rod (L0)al and (L0)i
Formula: LT = L0[(1 + α(T – T0)]
Calculation: For T0 = 0 °C
From formula,
LT = L0(1 + αT)
For aluminium,
(L0)al = (L0)al(1 + αalT) ……………. (1)
For iron,
(LT)i = (L0)i (1 + αiT) ………….. (2)
Subtracting equation (2) by (1),
(LT)i – (LT)al = [(L0)i + (L0)i αiT] – [(L0)al + (L0)alαalT]
= (L0)i – (L0)al + [(L0)i αi – (L0)al αal]T
∴ 1.5 = 1.5 + [(L0)i αi – (L0)al αal)]T
⇒ [(L0)iαi – (L0)alαal] T = 0
∴ (L0)alαal = (L0)iαi
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 2
Length of aluminium rod at 0 °C is 1.417 m and that of iron rod is 2.917 m.

Question 11.
What is the specific heat of a metal if 50 cal of heat is needed to raise 6 kg of the metal from 20°C to 62 °C ?
Solution:
Given: Q = 50 cal, m =6 kg,
∆T = 62 – 20 = 42 °C
To find: Specific heat (s)
Formula: Q = ms ∆T
Calculation: From formula,
s = \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}}{\mathrm{m} \Delta \mathrm{T}}=\frac{50}{6 \times 42}\) = 0.198 cal/kg °C
Specific heat of metal is copper 0.198 cal/kg °C.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 12.
The rate of flow of heat through a copper rod with temperature difference 30 °C is 1500 cal/s. Find the thermal resistance of copper rod.
Solution:
Given: ∆T = 30 °C, Pcond = 1500 cal/s
To find: Thermal resistance (RT)
Formula: RT = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{P}_{\text {cond }}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
RT = \(\frac{30}{1500}\)
= 0.02 °C s/cal.
Thermal resistance of copper rod is 0.02 °C s/cal.

Question 13.
An electric kettle takes 20 minutes to heat a certain quantity of water from 0°C to its boiling point. It requires 90 minutes to turn all the water at 100°C into steam. Find the latent heat of vaporisation. (Specific heat of water = 1cal/g°C)
Solution:
Let heat supplied by kettle in 20 minutes be Q1 and that in 90 min. be Q2.
Using heat temperature of water is raised from O °C to 100 °C.
If mass of water in the kettle is ‘m’ then.
Q1 = mswater∆T m × 1 × (100 – 0)
= 100 m ………….. (i)
…………. (∵ Swater = 1 cal/g °C)
Similarly using heat Q2 water is converted from liquid to gas,
∴ Q2 = mLvap ……………. (ii)
Given that heat Q1, Q2 are supplied to water in 20 min. (t1) and 90 min (t2) respectively.
Kettle being same its conduction rate (Pcond) is same.
Using Pcond = \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{Q}_{2}}{\mathrm{t}_{2}}\) …………… (iii)
From (i), (ii) and (iii),
\(\frac{100 \mathrm{~m}}{20}=\frac{\mathrm{mL}_{\text {vap }}}{90}\),
∴ Lvap = 5 × 90 = 450 cal/g
Latent heat of vaporisation for water is 450 cal/g.

Question 14.
Find the temperature difference between two sides of a steel plate 4 cm thick, when heat is transmitted through the plate at the rate of 400 k cal per minute per square metre at steady state. Thermal conductivity of steel is 0.026 kcal/m s K.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 6
Temperature difference between two sides is 10.26 K.
[Note: Above answer is expressed in K (‘kelvin considering that thermal conductivity is expressed in units of kcal / ms K, and not as kcal / m s °C. As 1 °C equivalent to 1 K. conceptually temperature difference of 10.26 K will correspond to 10.26 t]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 15.
A metal sphere cools from 80 °C to 60 °C in 6 min. How much time with it take to cool from 60 °C to 40 °C if the room temperature is 30°C?
Solution:
Given: T1 = 80 °C, T2 = 60 °C, T3 = 40 °C, T0 = 30 °C, (dt)1 = 6 min.
To find: Time taken in cooling (dt)2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 9
Time taken in cooling is 10 min.

11th Physics Digest Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter Intext Questions and Answers

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 125)

Question 1.
i) Why the metal wires for electrical transmission lines sag?
ii) Why a railway track is not a continuous piece but is made up of segments separated by gaps?
iii) How a steel wheel is mounted on an axle to fit exactly?
Answer:

  1. In hot weather, metal wires get heated due to increased temperature of surrounding. As a result, they expand increasing the slack between transmission line structure, causing them to sag.
  2. Railway tracks are made up of metals which expand upon heating. If no gap is kept between tracks, in hot weather, expansion of metal tracks may exert thermal stress on track. This may lead to bending of tracks which would be dangerous. Hence, railway track is not a continuous piece but is made up of segments separated by gaps.
  3. The steel wheel is heated to expand. This expanded wheel can easily fit over axle. The wheel is then cooled quickly. Upon cooling, wheel contracts and fits tightly upon the axle.

Intext question. (Textbook Page No 124)

Question 1.
Can you now tell why the balloon bursts sometimes when you try to fill air in it?
Answer:

  1. When balloon is blown, air that is blown inside makes the balloon expand.
  2. A given size of balloon can expand upto certain limit.
  3. Once that limit is reached and air is still blown inside the balloon, balloon cannot expand further.
  4. As a result, air causes additional pressure on inner surface of balloon.
  5. Since, pressure inside balloon is now greater than pressure outside balloon, balloon bursts equalizing the two pressures.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 125)

Question 1.
Why lakes freeze first at the surface?
Answer:

  1. In cold climate, temperature of water in ponds and lakes starts falling.
  2. On getting colder, water contracts. As a result, density of water increases and it goes down. To replace it, warmer water from below rises up. This process continues till temperature of water at the bottom of pond becomes 4 °C.
  3. Water, due to its anomalous behaviour possesses maximum density at 4 °C.
  4. If the temperature lowers further, ice is formed at the surface of pond with water below it.
  5. Ice being poor conductor of heat blocks the further heat exchange between atmosphere and water in the pond and maintains water below surface in liquid state.

Activity (Textbook Page No. 129)

Question 1.
To understand the process of change of state:
Take some cubes of ice in a beaker. Note the temperature of ice (0 °C). Start heating it slowly on a constant heat source. Note the temperature after every minute. Continuously stir the mixture of water and ice. Observe the change in temperature. Continue heating even after the whole of ice gets converted into water. Observe the change in temperature as before till vapours start coming out. Plot the graph of temperature (along Y-axis) versus time (along X-axis). Obtain a graph of temperature versus time.
Answer:
[Students are expected to attempt the activity on their own.]

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 130)

Question 1.
What is observed after point D in graph? Can steam be hotter than 100 °C?
Answer:
Beyond point D, thermometer again shows rise in temperature. This means, steam can be hotter than 100 °C and is termed as superheated steam.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 3

Question 2.
Why steam at 100 °C causes more harm to our skin than water at 100 °C?
Answer:

  1. Though steam and boiling water have same temperature, the heat contained in steam is more than that in boiling water.
  2. Steam is formed when boiling water absorbs specific latent heat of vaporisation i.e.. 22.6 × 105 J/kg.
  3. As a result, when steam comes in contact with the skin of a person, it gives off additional 22.6 × 105 joule per kilogram causing severe (more serious) burns.
    Hence, burns caused from steam are more serious than those caused from boiling water at same temperature.

Activity (Textbook Page No. 130)

Activity to understand the dependence of boiling point on pressure:
Take a round bottom flask, more than half filled with water. Keep it over a burner and fix a thermometer and steam outlet through the cork of the flask as shown in figure. As water in the flask gets heated, note that first the air, which was dissolved in the water comes out as small bubbles. Later bubbles of steam form at the bottom but as they rise to the cooler water near the top, they condense and disappear. Finally, as the temperature of the entire mass of the water reaches 100 oc, bubbles of steam reach the surface and boiling is said to occur. The steam in the flask may not be visible hut as it comes out of the flask, It condenses as tiny droplets of water giving a foggy appearance.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 4
If now the steam outlet is closed for a few seconds to increase the pressure in the flask, you will notice that boiling stops. More heat would be required to raise the temperature (depending on the increase in pressure) before boiling starts again. Thus, boiling point increases with increase in pressure. Let us now remove the burner. Allow water to cool to about 80°C. Remove the thermometers and steam outlet. Close the flask with a air tight cork. Keep the flask turned upside down on a stand. Pour icecold water on the flask. Water vapours in the flask condense reducing the pressure on the water surface inside the flask. Water begins to boil again, now at a lower temperature. Thus boiling point decreases with decrease in pressure and increases with increase in pressure.
Answer:
[Students are expected to attempt the activity an their own.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 131)

Question 1.
i) Why is cooking difficult at high altitude?
ii) Why is cooking faster in pressure cooker?
Answer:

    • At high altitude density of air is low which causes reduction in atmospheric pressure.
    • As pressure is less, boiling point of water lowers.
    • Water, at high altitude, starts boiling below 100 OC.
    • As food is cooked mostly through the water boiling, cooking of food becomes difficult.
    • Pressure cooker operates by expelling air within the cooker and trapping steam produced from the liquid. (mostly water) boiling inside.
    • Due to high internal pressure, boiling point of liquid increases and liquid boils at temperature higher than its boiling point.
    • The increased boiling point allows more absorption of heat by liquid and steam formed is superheated.
    • As a result, food gets cooked quickly.

Internet my friend (Textbook Page No. 139)

i) https ://hyperphysics. phy-astr.gsu.edul/base/hframe.html
ii) https://youtu.be/7ZKHc5J6R5Q
iii) https://physics. info/expansion
Answer:
[Students are expected to visit the above mentioned webs it es and collect more information about the thermal properties of matter.]

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers:

11th Physics Chapter 1 Exercise Units and Measurements Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 1

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Units and Measurements Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 1 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 1 Exercise Solutions 

1. Choose the correct option.

Question 1.
[L1M1T-2] is the dimensional formula for
(A) Velocity
(B) Acceleration
(C) Force
(D) Work
Answer:
(C) Force

Question 2.
The error in the measurement of the sides of a rectangle is 1%. The error in the measurement of its area is
(A) 1%
(B) \(\frac{1}{2}\)%
(C) 2%
(D) None of the above.
Answer:
(C) 2%

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 3.
Light year is a unit of
(A) Time
(B) Mass
(C) Distance
(D) Luminosity
Answer:
(C) Distance

Question 4.
Dimensions of kinetic energy are the same as that of
(A) Force
(B) Acceleration
(C) Work
(D) Pressure
Answer:
(C) Work

Question 5.
Which of the following is not a fundamental unit?
(A) cm
(B) kg
(C) centigrade
(D) volt
Answer:
(D) volt

2. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Star A is farther than star B. Which star will have a large parallax angle?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 1
i). ‘b’ is constant for the two stars
∴ θ ∝ \(\frac{1}{D}\)

ii) As star A is farther i.e., DA > DB
⇒ θA < θB
Hence, star B will have larger parallax angle than star A.

Question 2.
What are the dimensions of the quantity l \(\sqrt{l / g}\), l being the length and g the acceleration due to gravity?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 2
[Note: When power of symbol expressing fundamental quantity appearing in the dimensional formula is not given, ills taken as 1.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 3.
Define absolute error, mean absolute error, relative error and percentage error.
Answer:
Absolute error:
a. For a given set of measurements of a quantity, the magnitude of the difference between mean value (Most probable value) and each individual value is called absolute error (∆a) in the measurement of that quantity.
b. absolute error = |mean value – measured value|
∆a1 = |amean – a1|
Similarly, ∆a2 = |amean – a2|
. . . ..
. . . .
. . . .
∆an = |amean – an|

Mean absolute error:
For a given set of measurements of a same quantity the arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors is called mean absolute error in the measurement of that physical quantity.
∆amean = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{1}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{2}+\ldots \ldots .+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{n}}{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}} \sum_{\mathrm{i}=1}^{n} \Delta \mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{i}}\)

Relative error:
The ratio of the mean absolute error in the measurement of a physical quantity to its arithmetic mean value is called relative error.
Relative error = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{mean}}}{\mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{mean}}}\)

Percentage error:
The relative error represented by percentage (i.e., multiplied by 100) is called the percentage error.
Percentage error = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{mean}}}{\mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{mean}}}\) × 100%
[Note: Considering conceptual conventions question is modified to define percentage error and not mean percentage error.]

Question 4.
Describe what is meant by significant figures and order of magnitude.
Answer:
Significant figures:

  1. Significant figures in the measured value of a physical quantity is the sum of reliable digits and the first uncertain digit.
    OR
    The number of digits in a measurement about which we are certain, plus one additional digit, the first one about which we are not certain is known as significant figures or significant digits.
  2. Larger the number of significant figures obtained in a measurement, greater is the accuracy of the measurement. The reverse is also true.
  3. If one uses the instrument of smaller least count, the number of significant digits increases.

Rules for determining significant figures:

  1. All the non-zero digits are significant, for example if the volume of an object is 178.43 cm3, there are five significant digits which are 1,7,8,4 and 3.
  2. All the zeros between two nonzero digits are significant, eg., m = 165.02 g has 5 significant digits.
  3. If the number is less than 1, the zero/zeroes on the right of the decimal point and to the left of the first nonzero digit are not significant e.g. in 0.001405, significant. Thus the above number has four significant digits.
  4. The zeroes on the right hand side of the last nonzero number are significant (but for this, the number must be written with a decimal point), e.g. 1.500 or 0.01500 both have 4 significant figures each.
    On the contrary, if a measurement yields length L given as L = 125 m = 12500 cm = 125000 mm, it has only three significant digits.

Order of magnitude:
The magnitude of any physical quantity can be expressed as A × 10n where ‘A’ is a number such that 0.5 ≤ A < 5 then, ‘n’ is an integer called the order of magnitude.
Examples:

  1. Speed of light in air = 3 × 108 m/s
    ∴ order of magnitude = 8
  2. Mass of an electron = 9.1 × 10-31 kg
    = 0.91 × 1030 kg
    ∴ order of magnitude = -30

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 5.
If the measured values of two quantities are A ± ∆A and B ± ∆B, ∆A and ∆B being the mean absolute errors. What is the maximum possible error in A ± B? Show that if Z = \(\frac{A}{B}\)
\(\frac{\Delta Z}{Z}=\frac{\Delta A}{A}+\frac{\Delta B}{B}\)
Answer:
Maximum possible error in (A ± B) is (∆A + ∆B).
Errors in divisions:
i) A
Suppose, Z = \(\frac{A}{B}\) and measured values of A and B are (A ± ∆A) and (B ± ∆B) then,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 5
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 6
∴ Maximum relative error of \(\frac{\Delta Z}{Z}=\pm\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{A}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{B}}{\mathrm{B}}\right)\)

ii) Thus, when two quantities are divided, the maximum relative error in the result is the sum of relative errors in each quantity.

Question 6.
Derive the formula for kinetic energy of a particle having mass m and velocity v using dimensional analysis
Answer:
Kinetic energy of a body depends upon mass (m) and velocity (v) of the body.
Let K.E. ∝ mx vy
∴ K.E. = kmx vy …….. (1)
where,
k = dimensionless constant of proportionality. Taking dimensions on both sides of equation (1),
[L2M1T-2] – [L0M1T0]x [L1M0T-1]y
= [L0MxT0] [LyM0T-y]
= [L0+yMx+0T0-y]
[L2M1T2] = [LyMxT-y] …………. (2)
Equating dimensions of L, M, T on both sides of equation (2),
x = 1 and y = 2 ,
Substituting x, y in equation (1), we have
K.E. = kmv2

3. Solve numerical examples.

Question 1.
The masses of two bodies are measured to be 15.7 ± 0.2 kg and 27.3 ± 0.3 kg. What is the total mass of the two and the error in it?
Answer:
Given: A ± ∆A = 15.7 ± 0.2kg and
B ± ∆B = 27.3 ± 0.3 kg.
To find: Total mass (Z), and total error (∆Z)
Formulae: i. Z = A + B

ii) ±∆Z = ±∆A ± ∆B
Calculation: From formula (i),
Z = 15.7 + 27.3 = 43 kg
From formula (ii),
± ∆Z (± 0.2) + (± 0.3)
=±(0.2 + 0.3)
= ± 0.5 kg
Total mass is 43 kg and total error is ± 0.5 kg.

Question 2.
The distance travelled by an object in time (100 ± 1) s is (5.2 ± 0.1) m. What is the speed and it’s relative error?
Answer:
Given: Distance (D ± ∆D) = (5.2 ± 0.1) m,
time(t ± ∆t) = (100 ± 1)s.
To find: Speed (v), maximum relative error \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{v}}\right)\)

Formulae: i. v = \(\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
ii. \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{v}}=\pm\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{t}}\right)\)

Calculation: From formula (i),
v = \(\frac{5.2}{100}\) = 0.052 m/s
From formula (ii),
\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{v}}=\pm\left(\frac{0.1}{5.2}+\frac{1}{100}\right)\)
= \(\pm\left(\frac{1}{52}+\frac{1}{100}\right)=\pm \frac{19}{650}\)
= ± 0.029 rn/s
The speed is 0.052 m/s and its maximum relative error is ± 0.029 m/s.
[Note: Framing of numerical is modified to make it specific and meaningful.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 3.
An electron with charge e enters a uniform. magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) with a velocity \(\vec{v}\). The velocity is perpendicular to the magnetic field. The force on the charge e is given by
|\(\vec{F}\)| = Bev Obtain the dimensions of \(\vec{B}\).
Answer:
Given: |\(\vec{F}\)| = B e v
Considering only magnitude, given equation is simplified to,
F = B e v
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 3
∴ B = [L0M1T-2I-1]
[Note: The answer given above is calculated in accordance with textual method considering the given data.]

Question 4.
A large ball 2 m in radius is made up of a rope of square cross section with edge length 4 mm. Neglecting the air gaps in the ball, what is the total length of the rope to the nearest order of magnitude?
Answer:
Volume of ball = Volume enclosed by rope.
\(\frac{4}{3}\) π (radius)3 = Area of cross-section of rope × length of rope.
∴ length of rope l = \(\frac{\frac{4}{3} \pi r^{3}}{A}\)
Given:
r = 2 m and
Area = A = 4 × 4 = 16 mm2
= 16 × 10-6 m2
∴ l = \(\frac{4 \times 3.142 \times 2^{3}}{3 \times 16 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= \(\frac{3.142 \times 2}{3}\) × 10-6 m
≈ 2 × 106 m.
Total length of rope to the nearest order of magnitude = 106 m = 103 km

Question 5.
Nuclear radius R has a dependence on the mass number (A) as R = 1.3 × 10-16 A\(\frac{1}{3}\) m. For a nucleus of mass number A=125, obtain the order of magnitude of R expressed in metre.
Answer:
R= 1.3 × 10-16 × A\(\frac{1}{3}\) m
For A = 125
R= 1.3 × 10-16 × (125)\(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 1.3 × 10-16 × 5
= 6.5 × 10-16
= 0.65 × 10-15 m
∴ Order of magnitude = -15
[Note: Taking the standard value of nuclear radius R = 1.3 × 10-155 m, the order of magnitude comes to be 10-14 m.]

Question 6.
In a workshop a worker measures the length of a steel plate with a Vernier callipers having a least count 0.01 cm. Four such measurements of the length yielded the following values: 3.11 cm, 3.13 cm, 3.14 cm, 3.14 cm. Find the mean length, the mean absolute error and the percentage error in the measured value of the length.
Answer:
Given: a1 = 3.11 cm, a2 = 3.13 cm,
a3 = 3.14 cm. a4 = 3.14cm
Least count L.C. = 0.01 cm.
To find.
i. Mean length (amean)
ii. Mean absolute error (∆amean)
iii. Percentage error.

Formulae: i. amean = \(\frac{a_{1}+a_{2}+a_{3}+a_{4}}{4}\)
ii. ∆an = |amean – an|
iii. ∆amean = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{1}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{2}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{3}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{4}}{4}\)
iv. Percentage error = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{mean}}}{\mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}}\) × 100

Calculation: From formula (i),
amean = \(\frac{3.11+3.13+3.14+3.14}{4}\)
= 3.13 cm
From formula (ii),
∆a1 = |3.13 – 3.11| = 0.02 cm
∆a2 = |3.13 – 3.13| = 0
∆a3 = |3.13 – 3.14| = 0.01 cm
∆a4 = |3.13 – 3.14| = 0.01 cm
From formula (iii),
∆amean = \(\frac{0.02+0+0.01+0.01}{4}\) = 0.01 cm
From formula (iii).
% error = \(\frac{0.01}{3.13}\) × 100
= \(\frac{1}{3.13}\)
= 0.3196
……..(using reciprocal table)
= 0.32%

i. Mean length is 3.13 cm.
ii. Mean absolute error is 0.01 cm.
iii. Percentage error is 0.32 %.
[Note: As per given data of numerical, percentage error calculation upon rounding off yields percentage error as 0.32%]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 7.
Find the percentage error in kinetic energy of a body having mass 60.0 ± 0.3 g moving with a velocity 25.0 ± 0.1 cm/s.
Answer:
Given: m = 60.0 g, v = 25.0 cm/s.
∆m = 0.3 g, ∆v = 0.1 cm/s
To find: Percentage error in E
Formula: Percentage error in E
\(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{m}}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{v}}\right)\) × 100%

Calculation: From formula,
Percentage error in E
= \(\left(\frac{0.3}{60.0}+2 \times \frac{0.1}{25.0}\right)\) × 100%
= 1.3%
The percentage error in energy is 1.3%.

Question 8.
In Ohm’s experiments, the values of the unknown resistances were found to be 6.12 Ω , 6.09 Ω, 6.22 Ω, 6.15 Ω. Calculate the mean absolute error, relative error and percentage error in these measurements.
Answer:
Given: a1 = 6.12 Ω, a2 = 6.09 Ω, a3 = 6.22 Ω, a4 = 6.15 Ω,

To find:

i) Absolute error (∆amean)
ii) Relative error
iii) Percentage error

Formulae:

i) amean = \(\frac{a_{1}+a_{2}+a_{3}+a_{4}}{4}\)
ii) ∆an = |amean – an|
iii) ∆amean = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{1}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{2}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{3}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{4}}{4}\)
iv) Percentage error = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\mathrm{mean}}}{\mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}}\) × 100

From formula (ii),
∆a1 = |6.145 – 6.12|= 0.025
∆a2 = |6.145 – 6.09| = 0.055
∆a3 = |6.145 – 6.22| = 0.075
∆a4 = |6.l45 – 6.15| = 0.005
From formula (iii),
∆amean = \(\frac{0.025+0.055+0.075+0.005}{4}=\frac{0.160}{4}\)
= 0.04 Ω
From formula (iv),
Relative error = \(\frac{0.04}{6.145}\) = 0.0065 Ω
From formula (v).
Percentage error = 0.0065 \frac{0.04}{6.145} 100 = 0.65%

i. The mean absolute error is 0.04 Ω.
ii. The relative error is 0.0065 Ω.
iii. The percentage error is 0.65%.
[Note: Framing of numerical is modified to reach the answer given to the numerical.]

Question 9.
An object is falling freely under the gravitational force. Its velocity after travelling a distance h is v. If v depends upon gravitational acceleration g and distance, prove with dimensional analysis that v = k\(\sqrt{g h}\) where k is a constant.
Answer:
Given = v = k\(\sqrt{g h}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 4
k being constant is assumed to be dimensionless.
Dimensions of L.H.S. = [v] = [L1T-1]
Dimension of R.H.S. = [latex]\sqrt{g h}[/latex]
= [L1T-2]\(\frac{1}{2}\) × [L1]\(\frac{1}{2}\)
= [L2T-2]\(\frac{1}{2}\)
= [L1T-1]
As, [L.H.S.] = [R.H.S.],
=> v = k\(\sqrt{g h}\)is dimensionally correct equation.

Question 10.
v = at + \(\frac{b}{t+c}\) + v0 is a dimensionally valid equation. Obtain the dimensional formula for a, b and c where v is velocity, t is time and v0 is initial velocity.
Answer:
Solution: Given: y = at + \(\frac{b}{t+c}\) + + v0

As only dimensionally identical quantities can be added together or subtracted from each other, each term on R.H.S. has dimensions of L.H.S. i.e., dimensions of velocity.

∴ [LH.S.] = [v] = [L1T-1]
This means, [at] = [v] = [L1T-1]
Given, t = time has dimension [T-1]
∴ [a] = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{L}^{1} \mathrm{~T}^{-1}\right]}{[\mathrm{t}]}=\frac{\left[\mathrm{L}^{1} \mathrm{~T}^{-1}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{T}^{1}\right]}\) = [L1T-2] = L1M0T-2]
Similarly, [c] = [t] = [T1] = [L0M0T1]
∴ \(\frac{[\mathrm{b}]}{\left[\mathrm{T}^{1}\right]}\) = [v] = [L1T-1]
∴ [b] = [L1T-1] × [T1] = [L1] = [L1M0T0]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 11.
The length, breadth and thickness of a rectangular sheet of metal are 4.234 m, 1.005 m, and 2.01 cm respectively. Give the area and volume of the sheet to correct significant figures.
Answer:
Given: l = 4.234 m, b = 1.005 m,
t = 2.01 cm = 2.01 × 10-2 m = 0.0201 m

To find:
i) Area of sheet to correct significant figures (A)
ii) Volume of sheet to correct significant figures (V)
Formulae: i. A = 2(lb + bt + tl)
iii) V = l × b × t

Calculation: From formula (i),
A = 2(4.234 × 1.005 + 1.005 × 0.0201 +0.0201 × 4.234)
= 2 |[antilog(log 4.234 + logl .005) + antiiog(log 1.005 + log0.0201) + antilog(log 0.0201 + log 4.234)]}
= 2{[antilog(0.6267 + 0.0021) + antilog(0.0021 + \(\overline{2}\) .3010) + antilog (\(\overline{2}\) .3010 + 0.6267)]}
= 2 {[antilog(0.6288) + antilog (\(\overline{2}[/latex .3031) +antilog([latex]\overline{2}\) .9277)]}
= 2 [4.254 + 0.02009 + 0.08467]
= 2 [4.35876]
= 8.71752m2

In correct significant figure,
A = 8.72 m2 From formula (ii),
V =4.234 × 1.005 × 0.0201
= antilog [log (4.234) + log (1.005) + log (0.0201)]
= antilog [0.6269 – 0.0021 – \(\overline{2}\).3032]
= antilog [0.6288 – \(\overline{2}\).3032]
= antilog [ 2 .9320]
= 8.551 × 10-2
= 0.08551 m3
In correct significant figure (rounding off),
V = 0.086 m3

i.) Area of sheet to correct significant figures is 8.72 m2.
ii) Volume of sheet to correct significant figures is 0.086 m3.
[Note: The given solution is arrived to by considering a rectangular sheet.]

Question 12.
If the length of a cylinder is l = (4.00 ± 0.001) cm, radius r = (0.0250 ± 0.001) cm and mass m = (6.25 ± 0.01) gm. Calculate the percentage error in the determination of density.
Answer:
Given: l = (4.00 ± 0.001) cm,
In order to have same precision, we use, (4.000 ± 0.001),
r = (0.0250 ± 0.00 1) cm,
In order to have same precision, we use, (0.025 ± 0.001)
m = (6.25 ± 0.01) g
To find: percentage error in density

Formulae:
i) Relative error in volume, \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{2 \Delta \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{r}}+\frac{\Delta l}{l}\)
….(∵ Volume of cylinder, V = πr2l)

ii) Releative error \(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}=\frac{\Delta m}{m}+\frac{\Delta V}{V}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 10

iii) Percentage error= Relative error × 100%

Calculation.
From formulae (i) and (ii),
∴ \(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{m}}+\frac{2 \Delta \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{r}}+\frac{\Delta l}{l}\)
= \(\frac{0.01}{6.25}+\frac{2(0.001)}{0.025}+\frac{0.001}{4.000}\)
= 0.00 16 + 0.08 + 0.00025
= 0.08 185
From formula (iii).
% error in density = \(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\) × 100
= 0.08185 × 100
= 8.185%
Percentage error in density is 8.185%.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 13.
When the planet Jupiter is at a distance of 824.7 million kilometers from the Earth, its angular diameter is measured to be 35.72″ of arc. Calculate the diameter of the Jupiter.
Answer:
Given: Angular diameter (a) = 35.72″
= 35.72″ × 4.847 × 10-6 rad
1.73 × 10-4 rad

Distance from Earth (D)
= 824.7 million km
= 824.7 × 106 km
= 824.7 × 109 m.

To find: Diameter of Jupiter (d)
Formula: d = α D
Calculation: From formula,
d = 1.73 × 10-4 × 824.7 × 109
= 1.428 × 108 m
= 1.428 × 105 km
Diameter of Jupiter is 1.428 × 105 km.

Question 14.
If the formula for a physical quantity is X = \(\frac{a^{4} b^{3}}{c^{1 / 3} d^{1 / 2}}\) and if the percentage error in the measurements of a, b, c and d are 2%, 3%, 3% and 4% respectively. Calculate percentage error in X.
Answer:
Given X = \(\frac{a^{4} b^{3}}{c^{1 / 3} d^{1 / 2}}\)
Percentage error in a, b, c, d is respectively 2%, 3%, 3% and 4%.
Now, Percentage error in X
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 7

Question 15.
Write down the number of significant figures in the following: 0.003 m2, 0.1250 gm cm-2, 6.4 × 106 m, 1.6 × 10-19 C, 9.1 × 10-31 kg.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 8

Question 16.
The diameter of a sphere is 2.14 cm. Calculate the volume of the sphere to the correct number of significant figures.
Answer:
Volume of sphere = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3
= \(\frac{4}{3}\) × 3.142 × (\(\frac{2.14}{2}\))3 ………….. (∵ r = \(\frac{d}{2}\))
= \(\frac{4}{3}\) × 3.142 × (1.07)3
= 1.333 × 3.142 × (1.07)3
= {antilog [log (1.333) + log(3.142)+3 log(1.07)]}
= {antilog [0.1249 + 0.4972 + 3 (0.0294)])
= {antilog [0.6221 + 0.0882]}
= {antilog [0.7103]}
= 5.133cm3
In multiplication or division, the final result should retain as many significant figures as there are in the original number with the least significant figures.
Volume in correct significant figures
∴ 5.13 cm3

11th Physics Digest Chapter 1 Units and Measurements Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall (Textbook Page No. 1)

Question 1.
i) What is a unit?
ii) Which units have you used in the laboratory for measuring
a. length
b. mass
c. time
d. temperature?
iii. Which system of units have you used?
Answer:

  1. The standard measure of any quantity is called the unit of that quantity.
  2. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 11
  3. MKS or SI system is used mostly. At times. even CGS system is used.

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 8)

Question 1.
If ten students are asked to measure the length of a piece of cloth upto a mm, using a metre scale, do you think their answers will be identical? Give reasons.
Answer:
Answers of the students are likely to be different. Length of cloth needs to be measured up to a millimetre (mm) length. Hence, to obtain accurate and precise reading one must use measuring instrument having least count smaller than 1 mm.

But least count of metre scale is 1 mm. As a result, even smallest uncertainty in reading would vary reading significantly. Also, skill of students doing measurement may also introduce uncertainty in observation.
Hence, their answers are likely to be different.

Activity (Textbook Page No. 10)

Perform an experiment using a Vernier callipers of least count 0.01cm to measure the external diameter of a hollow cylinder. Take 3 readings at different positions on the cylinder and find (i) the mean diameter (ii) the absolute mean error and (iii) the percentage error in the measurement of diameter.
Answer:
Given: L.C. = 0.01 cm
To measure external diameter of hollow cylinder readings are taken as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 12
[Note: The above table is made assuming zero error in Vernier callipers. If calliper has positive or negative zero error, the zero error correction needs to be introduced into observed reading.]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 13

Internet my friend (Textbook Page No. 12)

i. ideoiectures.net/mit801f99_lewin_lec0l/
ii. hyperphysicsphy-astr.gsu.ed u/libase/hfra me. html

[Students can use links given above as reference and collect information about units and measurements]

Class 11 Physics Questions And Answers

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers:

11th Physics Chapter 10 Exercise Electrostatics Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 10

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Electrostatics Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 10 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 10 Exercise Solutions 

1. Choose the correct option.

Question 1.
A positively charged glass rod is brought close to a metallic rod isolated from ground. The charge on the side of the metallic rod away from the glass rod will be
(A) same as that on the glass rod and equal in quantity
(B) opposite to that on the glass of and equal in quantity
(C) same as that on the glass rod but lesser in quantity
(D) same as that on the glass rod but more in quantity
Answer:
(A) same as that on the glass rod and equal in quantity

Question 2.
An electron is placed between two parallel plates connected to a battery. If the battery is switched on, the electron will
(A) be attracted to the +ve plate
(B) be attracted to the -ve plate
(C) remain stationary
(D) will move parallel to the plates
Answer:
(A) be attracted to the +ve plate

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 3.
A charge of + 7 µC is placed at the centre of two concentric spheres with radius 2.0 cm and 4.0 cm respectively. The ratio of the flux through them will be
(A) 1 : 4
(B) 1 : 2
(C) 1 : 1
(D) 1 : 16
Answer:
(C) 1 : 1

Question 4.
Two charges of 1.0 C each are placed one meter apart in free space. The force between them will be
(A) 1.0 N
(B) 9 × 109 N
(C) 9 × 10-9 N
(D) 10 N
Answer:
(B) 9 × 109 N

Question 5.
Two point charges of +5 µC are so placed that they experience a force of 80 × 10-3 N. They are then moved apart, so that the force is now 2.0 × 10-3 N. The distance between them is now
(A) 1/4 the previous distance
(B) double the previous distance
(C) four times the previous distance
(D) half the previous distance
Answer:
(B) double the previous distance

Question 6.
A metallic sphere A isolated from ground is charged to +50 µC. This sphere is brought in contact with other isolated metallic sphere B of half the radius of sphere A. The charge on the two sphere will be now in the ratio
(A) 1 : 2
(B) 2 : 1
(C) 4 : 1
(D) 1 : 1
Answer:
(D) 1 : 1

Question 7.
Which of the following produces uniform electric field?
(A) point charge
(B) linear charge
(C) two parallel plates
(D) charge distributed an circular any
Answer:
(C) two parallel plates

Question 8.
Two point charges of A = +5.0 µC and B = -5.0 µC are separated by 5.0 cm. A point charge C = 1.0 µC is placed at 3.0 cm away from the centre on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining the two point charges. The charge at C will experience a force directed towards
(A) point A
(B) point B
(C) a direction parallel to line AB
(D) a direction along the perpendicular bisector
Answer:
(C) a direction parallel to line AB

2. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
What is the magnitude of charge on an electron?
Answer:
The magnitude of charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10-19 C

Question 2.
State the law of conservation of charge.
Answer:
In any given physical process, charge may get transferred from one part of the system to another, but the total charge in the system remains constant”
OR
For an isolated system, total charge cannot be created nor destroyed.

Question 3.
Define a unit charge.
Answer:
Unit charge (one coulomb) is the amount of charge which, when placed at a distance of one metre from another charge of the same magnitude in vacuum, experiences a force of 9.0 × 109 N.

Question 4.
Two parallel plates have a potential difference of 10V between them. If the plates are 0.5 mm apart, what will be the strength of electric charge.
Answer:
V=10V
d = 0.5 mm = 0.5 × 10-3 m
To find: The strength of electric field (E)
Formula: E = \(\frac {V}{d}\)
Calculation: From formula,
E = \(\frac {10}{0.5×10^{-3}}\)
20 × 103 V/m

Question 5.
What is uniform electric field?
Answer:
A uniform electric field is a field whose magnitude and direction are same at all points. For example, field between two parallel plates as shown in the diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 1

Question 6.
If two lines of force intersect of one point. What does it mean?
Answer:
If two lines of force intersect of one point, it would mean that electric field has two directions at a single point.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 7.
State the units of linear charge density.
Answer:
SI unit of λ is (C / m).

Question 8.
What is the unit of dipole moment?
Answer:
i. Strength of a dipole is measured in terms of a quantity called the dipole moment.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 2

ii. Let q be the magnitude of each charge and 2\(\vec{l}\) be the distance from negative charge to positive charge. Then, the product q(2\(\vec{l}\)) is called the dipole moment \(\vec{p}\).

iii. Dipole moment is defined as \(\vec{p}\) = q(2\(\vec{l}\))

iv. A dipole moment is a vector whose magnitude is q (2\(\vec{l}\)) and the direction is from the negative to the positive charge.

v. The unit of dipole moment is coulomb-metre (C m) or debye (D).

Question 9.
What is relative permittivity?
Answer:
i. Relative permittivity or dielectric constant is the ratio of absolute permittivity of a medium to the permittivity of free space.
It is denoted as K or εr.
i.e., K or εr = \(\frac {ε}{ε_0}\)

ii. It is the ratio of the force between two point charges placed a certain distance apart in free space or vacuum to the force between the same two point charges when placed at the same distance in the given medium.
i.e., K or εr = \(\frac {F_{vacuum}}{F_{medium}}\)

iii. It is also called as specific inductive capacity or dielectric constant.

3. Solve numerical examples.

Question 1.
Two small spheres 18 cm apart have equal negative charges and repel each other with the force of 6 × 10-8 N. Find the total charge on both spheres.
Solution:
Given: F = 6 × 10-8 N, r = 18 cm = 18 × 10-2 m
To find: Total charge (q1 + q2)
Formula: F = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 3
Taking square roots from log table,
∴ q = -4.648 × 10-10 C
….(∵ the charges are negative)
Total charge = q1 + q2 = 2q
= 2 × (-4.648) × 10-10
= -9.296 × 10-10 C

Question 2.
A charge + q exerts a force of magnitude – 0.2 N on another charge -2q. If they are separated by 25.0 cm, determine the value of q.
Answer:
Given: q1 = + q, q2 = -2q, F = -0.2 N
r = 25 cm = 25 × 10-2 m
To find: Charge (q)
Formula: F = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q_1q_2}{r^2}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 4
[Note: The answer given above is calculated in accordance with textual method considering the given data]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 3.
Four charges of +6 × 10-8 C each are placed at the corners of a square whose sides are 3 cm each. Calculate the resultant force on each charge and show in direction on a diagram drawn to scale.
Answer:
Given: qA = qB = qC = qD = 6 × 10-8 C, a = 3 cm
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 5
∴ Resultant force on ‘A’
= FAD cos 45 + FAB cos 45 + FAC
= (3.6 × 10-2 × \(\frac {1}{√2}\)) + (3.6 × 10-2 × \(\frac {1}{√2}\)) + 1.8 × 10-2
= 6.89 × 10-2 N directed along \(\vec{F_{AC}}\)

Question 4.
The electric field in a region is given by \(\vec{E}\) = 5.0 \(\hat{k}\) N/C Calculate the electric flux through a square of side 10.0 cm in the following cases
i. The square is along the XY plane
ii. The square is along XZ plane
iii. The normal to the square makes an angle of 45° with the Z axis.
Answer:
Given: \(\vec{E}\) = 5.0 \(\hat{k}\) N/C, |E| = 5 N/C
l = 10 cm = 10 × 10-2 m = 10-1 m
A = l² – 10-2
To find: Electric flux in three cases.
1) (ø2) (ø3)
Formula: (ø1) = EA cos θ
Calculation:
Case I: When square is along the XY plane,
∴ θ = 0
ø1 = 5 × 10-2 cos 0
= 5 × 10-2 V m

Case II: When square is along XZ plane,
∴ θ = 90°
ø1 = 5 × 10-2 cos 90° = 0 V m

Case III: When normal to the square makes an angle of 45° with the Z axis.
∴ 0 = 45°
∴ ø3 = 5 × 10-2 × cos 45°
= 3.5 × 10-2 V m

Question 5.
Three equal charges of 10 × 10-8 C respectively, each located at the corners of a right triangle whose sides are 15 cm, 20 cm and 25 cm respectively. Find the force exerted on the charge located at the 90° angle.
Answer:
Given: qA = qB = qC = 10 × 10-8
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 6
Force on B due to A,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 7

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Question 6.
A potential difference of 5000 volt is applied between two parallel plates 5 cm apart. A small oil drop having a charge of 9.6 x 10-19 C falls between the plates. Find (i) electric field intensity between the plates and (ii) the force on the oil drop.
Answer:
Given: V = 5000 volt, d = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m
q = 9.6 × 10-19 C
To find:
i. Electric field intensity (E)
ii. Force (F)
Formula:
i. E = \(\frac {V}{d}\) \(\frac {q}{r}\)
ii. E = \(\frac {F}{q}\)
Calculation: From formula (i),
E = \(\frac {F}{q}\) = 105 N/C
From formula (ii)
F = E x q
= 105 × 9.6 × 10-19
= 9.6 × 10-14 N

Question 7.
Calculate the electric field due to a charge of -8.0 × 10-8 C at a distance of 5.0 cm from it.
Answer:
Given: q = – 8 × 10-8 C, r = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m
To Find: Electric field (E)
Formula: E = \(\frac {1}{4πε_0}\) \(\frac {q}{r^2}\)
Calculation: From formula,
E = 9 × 109 × \(\frac {(-8×10^{-8})}{(5×10^{-2})^2}\)
= -2.88 × 105 N/C

11th Physics Digest Chapter 10 Electrostatics Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall? (Textbookpage no. 188)

Question 1.
Have you experienced a shock while getting up from a plastic chair and shaking hand with your friend?
Answer:
Yes, sometimes a shock while getting up from a plastic chair and shaking hand with friend is experienced.

Question 2.
Ever heard a crackling sound while taking out your sweater in winter?
Answer:
Yes, sometimes while removing our sweater in winter, some crackling sound is heard and the sweater appears to stick to body.

Question 3.
Have you seen the lightning striking during pre-monsoon weather?
Answer:
Yes, sometimes lightning striking during pre-pre-monsoon weather seen.

Can you tell? (Textbook page no. 189)

i. When a petrol or a diesel tanker is emptied in a tank, it is grounded.
ii. A thick chain hangs from a petrol or a diesel tanker and it is in contact with ground when the tanker is moving.
Answer:
i. When a petrol or a diesel tanker is emptied in a tank, it is grounded so that it has an electrically conductive connection from the petrol or diesel tank to ground (Earth) to allow leakage of static and electrical charges.

ii. Metallic bodies of cars, trucks or any other big vehicles get charged because of friction between them and the air rushing past them. Hence, a thick chain is hanged from a petrol or a diesel tanker to make a contact with ground so that charge produced can leak to the ground through chain.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Can you tell? (Textbook page no. 194)

Three charges, q each, are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. What will be the resultant force on charge q placed at the centroid of the triangle?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics 8
Since AD. BE and CF meets at O, as centroid of an equilateral triangle.
∴ OA = OB = OC
∴ Let, r = OA = OB = OC
Force acting on point O due to charge on point A,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{OA}}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}_{i}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}_{\mathrm{AO}}\)
Force acting on point O due to charge on point B,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{O \mathrm{~B}}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}_{\mathrm{BO}}\)
Force acting on point O due to charge on point C,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{OC}}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{\mathrm{q}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}} \mathrm{co}\)
∴ Resultant force acting on point O,
F = \(\vec{F}\)OA + \(\vec{F}\)OB + \(\vec{F}\)OC
On resolving \(\vec{F}\)OB and \(\vec{F}\)OC, we get –\(\vec{F}\)OA
i.e., \(\vec{F}\)OB + \(\vec{F}\)OC = –\(\vec{F}\)OA
∴ \(\vec{F}\) = \(\vec{F}\)OA – \(\vec{F}\)OA = 0
Hence, the resultant force on the charge placed at the centroid of the equilateral triangle is zero.

Can you tell? (Textbook page no. 197)

Why a small voltage can produce a reasonably large electric field?
Answer:

  1. Electric field produced depends upon voltage as well as separation distance.
  2. Electric field varies linearly with voltage and inversely with distance.
  3. Hence, even if voltage is small, it can produce a reasonable large electric field when the gap between the electrode is reduced significantly.

Can you tell? (Textbook page no. 198)

Lines of force are imaginary; can they have any practical use?
Answer:
Yes, electric lines of force help us to visualise the nature of electric field in a region.

Can you tell? (Textbook page no. 204)

The surface charge density of Earth is σ = -1.33 nC/m². That is about 8.3 × 109 electrons per square metre. If that is the case why don’t we feel it?
Answer:
The Earth along with its atmosphere acts as a neutral system. The atmosphere (ionosphere in particular) has nearly equal and opposite charge.

As a result, there exists a mechanism to replenish electric charges in the form of continual thunder storms and lightning that occurs in different parts of the globe. This makes average charge on surface of the Earth as zero at any given time instant. Hence, we do not feel it.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Electrostatics

Internet my friend (Textbook page no. 205)

i. https://www.physicsclassroom.com/class
ii. https://courses.lumenleaming.com/physics/
iii. https://www,khanacademy.org/science
iv. https://www.toppr.com/guides/physics/
[Students are expected to visit the above mentioned websites and collect more information about electrostatics.]

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers:

11th Physics Chapter 5 Exercise Gravitation Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 5

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Gravitation Class 11 Exercise Question Answers Solutions Maharashtra Board

Class 11 Physics Chapter 5 Exercise Solutions Maharashtra Board

Physics Class 11 Chapter 5 Exercise Solutions 

1. Choose the correct option.

Question 1.
The value of acceleration due to gravity is maximum at
(A) the equator of the Earth .
(B) the centre of the Earth.
(C) the pole of the Earth.
(D) slightly above the surface of the Earth.
Answer:
(C) the pole of the Earth.

Question 2.
The weight of a particle at the centre of the Earth is _________
(A) infinite.
(B) zero.
(C) same as that at other places.
(D) greater than at the poles.
Answer:
(B) zero.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 3.
The gravitational potential due to the Earth is minimum at
(A) the centre of the Earth.
(B) the surface of the Earth.
(C) a points inside the Earth but not at its centre.
(D) infinite distance.
Answer:
(A) the centre of the Earth.

Question 4.
The binding energy of a satellite revolving around planet in a circular orbit is 3 × 109 J. Its kinetic energy is _________
(A) 6 × 109 J
(B) -3 × 109 J
(C) -6 × 10+9 J
(D) 3 × 10+9J
Answer:
(D) 3 × 10+9J

2. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
State Kepler’s law equal of area.
Answer:
The line that joins a planet and the Sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.

Question 2.
State Kepler’s law of period.
Answer:
The square of the time period of revolution of a planet around the Sun is proportional to the cube of the semimajor axis of the ellipse traced by the planet.

Question 3.
What are the dimensions of the universal gravitational constant?
Answer:
The dimensions of universal gravitational constant are: [L3M-1T-2].

Question 4.
Define binding energy of a satellite.
Answer:
The minimum energy required by a satellite to escape from Earth ‘s gravitational influence is the binding energy of the satellite.

Question 5.
What do you mean by geostationary satellite?
Answer:
Some satellites that revolve around the Earth in equatorial plane have same sense of rotation as that of the Earth. The also have the same period of rotation as that of the Earth i.e.. 24 hours. Due to this, these satellites appear stationary from the Earth’s surface and are known as geostationary satellites.

Question 6.
State Newton’s law of gravitation.
Answer:
Statement:
Every particle of matter attracts every other particle of matter with a force which is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 7.
Define escape velocity of a satellite.
Answer:
The minimum velocity with which a both’ should he thrown vertically upwards from the surface of the Earth so that it escapes the Earth ‘s gravitational field, is called the escape velocity (ve) of the body.

Question 8.
What is the variation in acceleration due to gravity with altitude?
Answer:
Variation in acceleration due to gravity due to altitude is given by, gh = g\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)^{2}\)
where,
gh = acceleration due to gravity of an object placed at h altitude
g = acceleration due to gravity on surface of the Earth
R = radius of the Earth
h = attitude height of the object from the surface of the Earth.
Hence, acceleration due to gravity decreases with increase in altitude.

Question 9.
On which factors does the escape speed of a body from the surface of Earth depend?
Answer:
The escape speed depends only on the mass and radius of the planet.
[Note: Escape velocity does not depend upon the mass of the body]

Question 10.
As we go from one planet to another planet, how will the mass and weight of a body change?
Answer:

  1. As we go from one planet to another, mass of a body remains unaffected.
  2. However, due to change in mass and radius of planet, acceleration due to gravity acting on the body changes as, g ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\).
    Hence, weight of the body also changes as, W ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)

Question 11.
What is periodic time of a geostationary satellite?
Answer:
The periodic time of a geostationary satellite is same as that of the Earth i.e., one day or 24 hours.

Question 12.
State Newton’s law of gravitation and express it in vector form.
Answer:

  1. Statement:
    Every particle of matter attracts every other particle of matter with a force which is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.
  2. In vector form, it can be expressed as,
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}=\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\left(-\hat{\mathrm{r}}_{21}\right)\)
    where, \(\hat{\mathbf{r}}_{21}\) is the unit vector from m1 to m2.
    The force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}\) is directed from m2 to m1.

Question 13.
What do you mean by gravitational constant? State its SI units.
Answer:

  1. From Newton’s law of gravitation,
    F = G \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    where, G = constant called universal gravitational constant Its value is 667 X 10-11 N m2/kg2.
  2. G = \(\frac{\mathrm{Fr}^{2}}{\mathrm{~m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}\)
    If m1 = m2 = 1 kg, r = 1 m thenF = G.
    Hence, the universal gravitational constant is the force of gravitation between two particles of unit mass separated by unit distance.
  3. Unit: N m2/kg2 in SI system.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 14.
Why is a minimum two stage rocket necessary for launching of a satellite?
Answer:

  1. For the projection of an artificial satellite, it is necessary for the satellite to have a certain velocity.
  2. In a single stage rocket, when the fuel in first stage of rocket is ignited on the surface of the Earth, it raises the satellite vertically.
  3. The velocity of projection of satellite normal to the surface of the Earth is the vertical velocity.
  4. If this vertical velocity is less than the escape velocity (ve), the satellite returns to the Earth’s surface. While, if the vertical velocity is greater than or equal to the escape velocity, the satellite will escape from Earth’s gravitational influence and go to infinity.
  5. Hence, minimum two stage rocket, one to raise the satellite to desired height and another to provide required hori7ontal velocity, is necessary for launching of a satellite.

Question 15.
State the conditions for various possible orbits of a satellite depending upon the horizontal speed of projection
Answer:
The path of the satellite depends upon the value of horizontal speed of projection vh relative to critical velocity vc and escape velocity ve.
Case (I) vh < vc:
The orbit of satellite is an ellipse with point of projection as apogee and Earth at one of the foci. During this elliptical path, if the satellite passes through the Earth’s atmosphere. it experiences a nonconservative force of air resistance. As a result it loses energy and spirals down to the Earth.
Case (II) vh = vc:
The satellite moves in a stable circular orbit around the Earth.
Case (III) vc < vh < ve:
The satellite moves in an elliptical orbit round the Earth with the point of projection as perigee.
Case (IV) vh = ve
The satellite travels along parabolic path and never returns to the point of projection. Its speed will be zero at infinity.
Case (V) vh > ve:
The satellite escapes from gravitational influence of Earth traversing a hyperbolic path.

3. Answer the following questions in detail.

Question 1.
Derive an expression for critical velocity of a satellite.
Answer:
Expression for critical velocity:

  1. Consider a satellite of mass m revolving round the Earth at height h above its surface. Let M be the mass of the Earth and R be its radius.
  2. If the satellite is moving in a circular orbit of radius (R + h) = r, its speed must be equal to the magnitude of critical velocity vc.
  3. The centripetal force necessary for circular motion of satellite is provided by gravitational force exerted by the satellite on the Earth.
    ∴ Centripetal force = Gravitational force
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 13
    This is the expression for critical speed at the orbit of radius (R + h).
  4. The critical speed of a satellite is independent of the mass of the satellite. It depends upon the mass of the Earth and the height at which the satellite is revolving or gravitational acceleration at that altitude.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 2.
State any four applications of a communication satellite.
Answer:
Applications of communication satellite:

  1. For the transmission of television and radiowave signals over large areas of Earth’s surface.
  2. For broadcasting telecommunication.
  3. For military purposes.
  4. For navigation surveillance.

Question 3.
Show that acceleration due to gravity at height h above the Earth’s surface is gh = g(\(\frac{R}{R+h}\))2
Answer:
Variation of g due to altitude:

  1. Let,
    R = radius of the Earth,
    M = mass of the Earth.
    g = acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the Earth.
  2. Consider a body of mass m on the surface of the Earth. The acceleration due to gravity on the Earth’s surface is given by,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 3
  3. The body is taken at height h above the surface of the Earth as shown in figure. The acceleration due to gravity now changes to,
    gh = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})^{2}}\) …………. (2)
  4. Dividing equation (2) by equation (1), we get,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 4
    We can rewrite,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 5
    This expression can be used to calculate the value of g at height h above the surface of the Earth as long as h<< R.

Question 4.
Draw a labelled diagram to show different trajectories of a satellite depending upon the tangential projection speed.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 14
vh = horizontal speed of projection
v c = critical velocity
ve = escape velocity

Question 5.
Derive an expression for binding energy of a body at rest on the Earth’s surface.
Answer:

  1. Let,
    M = mass of the Earth
    m = mass of the satellite
    R = radius of the Earth.
  2. Since the satellite is at rest on the Earth, v = 0
    ∴ Kinetic energy of satellite.
    K.E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = 0
  3. Gravitational potential at the Earth’s surface
    = – \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
    ∴ Potential energy of satellite = Gravitational potential × mass of satellite
    = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
  4. Total energy of sitellite = T.E = P.E + K.E
    ∴ T.E. = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\) + 0 = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
  5. Negative sign in the energy indicates that the satellite is bound to the Earth, due to gravitational force of attraction.
  6. For the satellite to be free form Earth’s gravitational influence, its total energy should become positive. That energy is the binding energy of the satellite at rest on the surface of the Earth.
    ∴ B.E. = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 6.
Why do astronauts in an orbiting satellite have a feeling of weightlessness?
Answer:

  1. For an astronaut, in a satellite, the net force towards the centre of the Earth will always be, F = mg – N.
    where, N is the normal reaction.
  2. In the case of a revolving satellite, the satellite is performing a circular motion. The acceleration for this motion is centripetal, which is provided by the gravitational acceleration g at the location of the satellite.
  3. In this case, the downward acceleration, ad = g, or the satellite (along with the astronaut) is in the state of free fall.
  4. Thus, the net force acting on astronaut will be, F = mg – mad i.e., the apparent weight will be zero, giving the feeling of total weightlessness.

Question 7.
Draw a graph showing the variation of gravitational acceleration due to the depth and altitude from the Earth’s surface.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 9

Question 8.
At which place on the Earth’s surface is the gravitational acceleration maximum? Why?
Answer:

  1. Gravitational acceleration on the surface of the Earth depends on latitude of the place as well as rotation and shape of the Earth.
  2. At poles, latitude θ = 90°.
    ∴ g’ = g
    i.e., there is no reduction in acceleration due to gravity at poles.
  3. Also, shape of the Earth is actually an ellipsoid, bulged at equator. The polar radius of the Earth is 6356 km which minimum. As g ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\), acceleration due to gravity is maximum at poles i.e., 9.8322 m/s2.

Question 9.
At which place on the Earth surface the gravitational acceleration minimum? Why?
Answer:

  1. Gravitational acceleration on the surface of the Earth depends on latitude of the place as well as rotation and shape of the Earth.
  2. At equator, latitude θ = 0°.
    ∴ g’ = g – Rω2
    i.e., the acceleration due to gravity ¡s reduced by amount Rω2(≈ 0.034 m/s2) at equator.
  3. Also, shape of the Earth is actually an ellipsoid, bulged at equator. The equatorial radius of the Earth is 6378 km, which is maximum. As g ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\) acceleration due to gravity is minimum on equator i.e., 9.7804 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 10.
Define the binding energy of a satellite. Obtain an expression for binding energy of a satellite revolving around the Earth at certain attitude.
Answer:
The minimum energy required by a satellite to escape from Earth ‘s gravitational influence is the binding energy of the satellite.
Expression for binding energy of satellite revolving in circular orbit round the Earth:

  1. Consider a satellite of mass m revolving at height h above the surface of the Earth in a circular orbit. It possesses potential energy as well as kinetic energy.
  2. Let M be the mass of the Earth, R be the Radius of the Earth, vc be critical velocity of satellite, r = (R + h) be thc radius of the orbit.
  3. Kinetic energy of satellite = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{c}}^{2}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
  4. The gravitational potential at a distance r from the centre of the Earth is –\(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
    ∴ Potential energy of satellite = Gravitational potential × mass of satellite
    = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
  5. The total energy of satellite is given as T.E. = KF. + P.E.
    = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}}-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}}=-\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
  6. Total energy of a circularly orbiting satellite is negative. Negative sign indicates that the satellite is bound to the Earth, due to gravitational force of attraction. For the satellite to be free from the Earth’s gravitational influence its total energy should become zero or positive.
  7. Hence the minimum energy to be supplied to unbind the satellite is +\(\frac{1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}}\). This is the binding energy of a satellite.

Question 11.
Obtain the formula for acceleration due to gravity at the depth ‘d’ below the Earth’s surface.
Answer:

  1. The Earth can be considered to be a sphere made of large number of concentric uniform spherical shells.
  2. When an object is on the surface of the Earth it experiences the gravitational force as if the entire mass of the Earth is concentrated at its centre.
  3. The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Earth is, g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
  4. Assuming that the density of the Earth is uniform, mass of the Earth is given by
    M = volume x density = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πR3ρ
    ∴ g = \(\frac{\mathrm{G} \times \frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R}^{3} \rho}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πRρG ………….. (1)
  5. Consider a body at a point P at the depth d below the surface of the Earth as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 6
    Here the force on a body at P due to outer spherical shell shown by shaded region, cancel out due to symmetry.
    The net force on P is only due to the inner sphere of radius OP = R – d.
  6. Acceleration due to gravity because of this sphere is,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 7
    This equation gives acceleration due to gravity at depth d below the Earth’s surface.

Question 12.
State Kepler’s three laws of planetary motion.
Answer:

  • All planets move in elliptical orbits around the Sun with the Sun at one of the foci of the ellipse.
  • The line that joins a planet and the Sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.
  • The square of the time period of revolution of a planet around the Sun is proportional to the cube of the semimajor axis of the ellipse traced by the planet.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 13.
State the formula for acceleration due to gravity at depth ‘d’ and altitude ‘h’ Hence show that their ratio is equal to \(\left(\frac{R-d}{R-2 h}\right)\) by assuming that the altitude is very small as compared to the radius of the Earth.
Answer:

  1. For an object at depth d, acceleration due to gravity of the Earth is given by,
    gd = g(1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\)) ………………. (1)
  2. Also, the acceleration due to gravity at smaller altitude h is given by,
    gh = g(1 – \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{R}}\)) ……………. (2)
  3. Hence, dividing equation (1) by equation (2),
    we get,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 8

Question 14.
What is critical velocity? Obtain an expression for critical velocity of an orbiting satellite. On what factors does it depend?
Answer:
The exact horizontal velocity of projection that must be given to a satellite at a certain height so that it can revolve in a circular orbIt round the Earth is called the critical velocity or orbital velocity (vc).
Expression for critical velocity:

  1. Consider a satellite of mass m revolving round the Earth at height h above its surface. Let M be the mass of the Earth and R be its radius.
  2. If the satellite is moving in a circular orbit of radius (R + h) = r, its speed must be equal to the magnitude of critical velocity vc.
  3. The centripetal force necessary for circular motion of satellite is provided by gravitational force exerted by the satellite on the Earth.
    ∴ Centripetal force = Gravitational force
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 13
    This is the expression for critical speed at the orbit of radius (R + h).
  4. The critical speed of a satellite is independent of the mass of the satellite. It depends upon the mass of the Earth and the height at which the satellite is revolving or gravitational acceleration at that altitude.

Question 15.
Define escape speed. Derive an expression for the escape speed of an object from the surface of the earth.
Answer:

  1. The minimum velocity with which a both’ should he thrown vertically upwards from the surface of the Earth so that it escapes the Earth ‘s gravitational field, is called the escape velocity (ve) of the body.
  2. As the gravitational force due to Earth becomes zero at infinite distance, the object has to reach infinite distance in order to escape.
  3. Let us consider the kinetic and potential energies of an object thrown vertically upwards with escape velocity ve.
  4. On the surface of the Earth,
    K.E.= \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{e}}^{2}\)
    P.E. = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
    Total energy = P.E. + K.E.
    ∴ T.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{e}}^{2}-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\) ………………. (1)
  5. The kinetic energy of the object will go on decreasing with time as it is pulled back by Earth’s gravitational force. It will become zero when it reaches infinity. Thus, at infinite distance from the Earth,
    K.E. = 0
    Also,
    P.E. = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\infty}\) = 0
    ∴ Total energy = P.E. + K.E. = 0
  6. As energy is conserved
    \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}_{\mathrm{e}}^{2}-\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}=0\) ……[From(1)]
    or, ve = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 16.
Describe how an artificial satellite using two stage rocket is launched in an orbit around the Earth.
Answer:

  1. Launching of a satellite in an orbit around the Earth cannot take place by use of single stage rocket. It requires minimum two stage rocket.
  2. With the help of first stage of rocket, satellite can be taken to a desired height above the surface of the Earth.
  3. Then the launcher is rotated in horizontal direction i.e.. through 900 using remote control and the first stage of the rocket is detached.
  4. With the help of second stage of rocket, a specific horizontal velocity (vh) is given to satellite so that it can revolve in a circular path around the Earth.
  5. The satellite follows different paths depending upon the horizontal velocity provided to it.

4. Solve the following problems.

Question 1.
At what distance below the surface of the Earth, the acceleration due to gravity decreases by 10% of its value at the surface, given radius of Earth is 6400 km.
Solution:
Given: gd = 90% of g i.e., \(\frac{\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{d}}}{\mathrm{g}}\) = 0.9,
R = 6400km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Distance below the Earth’s surface (d)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 10
At distance 640 km below the surface of the Earth, value of acceleration due to gravity decreases by 10%.

Question 2.
If the Earth were made of wood, the mass of wooden Earth would have been 10% as much as it is now (without change in its diameter). Calculate escape speed from the surface of this Earth.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 12
As, we know that the escape speed from surface of the Earth is 11.2 km/s, Substituting value of ve = 11.2 km/s
Vew = 11.2 × \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{10}}=\frac{11.2}{3.162}\)
= 11.2 × \(\frac{1}{3.162}\)
…………… [Taking square root value]
= antilog {log(1 1.2) –  Log(3.162)}
= antilog {1.0492 – 0.5000}
= antilog {0.5492} = 3.542
∴ Vew = 3.54km/s
The escape velocity from the surface of wooden Earth is 3.54 km/s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 3.
Calculate the kinetic energy, potential energy, total energy and binding energy of an artificial satellite of mass 2000 kg orbiting at a height of 3600 km above the surface of the Earth.
Given:- G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
R = 6400 km
M = 6 × 1024 kg
Solution:
Given:- m = 2000 kg, h = 3600 km = 3.6 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
R = 6400 km
M = 6 × 1024 kg

To find: i) Kninetic energy (K.E.)
ii) Potential Energy (P.E.)
iii) Total Energy (T.E.)
iv) Binding Energy (B.E.)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 17
From formula (ii),
P.E. = -2 × 40.02 × 109
= -80.04 × 109 J
From formula (iii),
T.E. = (40.02 × 109) + (-80.02 × 109)
= -40.02 × 109 J
From formula (iv),
B.E.= -(-40.02 × 109)
= 40.02 × 109 J
Kinetic energy of the satellite is 40.02 × 109 J, potential energy is -80.04 × 109 J, total energy is -40.02 × 109 J and binding energy is 40.02 × 109 J.
[Note: Total energy of orbiting satellite is negative.]

Question 4.
Two satellites A and B are revolving around a planet. Their periods of revolution are 1 hour and 8 hours respectively. The radius of orbit of satellite B is 4 × 104 km. find radius of orbit of satellite A .
Solution:
Given: TA = 1 hour, TB = 8 hour,
rB = 4 × 104 km
To find: Radius of orbit of satellite A (rA)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 16
Radius of orbit of satellite A will be 1 × 104 km.

Question 5.
Find the gravitational force between the Sun and the Earth.
Given Mass of the Sun = 1.99 × 1030 kg
Mass of the Earth = 5.98 × 1024 kg
The average distance between the Earth and the Sun = 1.5 × 1011 m.
Solution:
Given: MS = 1.99 × 1030 kg
ME = 5.98 × 1024 kg, R = 1.5 × 1011 m.
To find: Gravitational force between the Sun and the Earth (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Calculation:As, we know, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 1
= antilog {(log(6.67) + log( 1.99) + log(5.98) – log(2.25)} × 1021
= antilog {(0.8241) + (0.2989) + (0.7767) – (0.3522)} × 1021
= antilog {1.5475} × 1021
= 35.28 × 1021
= 3.5 × 1022 N
The gravitational force between the Sun and the Earth is 3.5 × 1022 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 6.
Calculate the acceleration due to gravity at a height of 300 km from the surface of the Earth. (M = 5.98 × 1024 kg, R = 6400 km).
Solution:
Given: h = 300 km = 0.3 × 106 m,
M = 5.98 × 1024 kg,
R = 6400km = 6.4 × 106 m
G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2
To find: Acceleration due to gravity at height (gh)
Formula: gh = \(\frac{G M}{(R+h)^{2}}\)

Calculation: From formula,
gh = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 5.98 \times 10^{24}}{\left[\left(6.4 \times 10^{6}\right)+\left(0.3 \times 10^{6}\right)\right]^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{6.67 \times 5.98 \times 10^{13}}{(6.7)^{2} \times 10^{12}}\)
6.67 X 10” x 5.98 X iO
= antilog {log(6.67) + log(5.98) – 2log(6.7)} × 10
= antilog{0.8241 + 0.7767 – 2(0.8261)} × 10
= antilog {1.6008 – 1.6522} × 10
= antilog {\(\overline{1}\) .9486} × 10
= 0.8884 × 10 = 8.884 m/s2
Acceleration due to gravity at 300 km will be 8.884 m/s2.

Question 7.
Calculate the speed of a satellite in an orbit at a height of 1000 km from the Earth’s surface. ME = 5.98 × 1024 kg, R = 6.4 × 106 m.
Solution:
Given: h = 1000 km = 1 × 106 m,
ME = 5.98 × 1024 kg, R = 6.4 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Speed of satellite (vc)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 15
Speed of the satellite at height 1000 km is 7.34 × 103 m/s.

Question 8.
Calculate the value of acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Mars if the radius of Mars = 3.4 × 103 km and its mass is 6.4 × 1023 kg.
Solution:
Given:
M = 6.4 × 1023 kg
R = 3.4 × 103 = 3.4 × 106 m,
To find: Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Mars (gM)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: As, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
From formula,
gM = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6.4 \times 10^{23}}{\left(3.4 \times 10^{6}\right)^{2}}=\frac{6.67 \times 6.4}{3.4 \times 3.4}\)
= antilog {log(6.67) + log(6.4) – log(3.4) – log(3.4)}
= antilog {(0.8241) + (0.8062) – (0.5315) – (0.53 15)}
= antilog {0.5673}
= 3.693 m/s2
Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Mars is 3.693 m/s2.

Question 9.
A planet has mass 6.4 × 1024 kg and radius 3.4 × 106 m. Calculate energy required to remove on object of mass 800 kg from the surface of the planet to infinity.
Solution:
Given: M = 6.4 × 1024 kg, R = 3.4 × 106 m, m = 800 kg
To find:   Energy required to remove the object from surface of planet to infinity = B.E.
Formula:    B.E. = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Calculation: We know that,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 18
= antilog{log(6.67) + log(51.2) – log(3.4)} × 109
= antilog{0.8241 + 1.7093 – 0.5315} × 109
= antilog {2.0019} × 109
= 1.004 × 102 × 109
= 1.004 × 1011 J
Energy required to remove the object from the surface of the planet is 1.004 × 1011 J.
[Note: Answer calculated above ¡s in accordance with retual methods of calculation.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 10.
Calculate the value of the universal gravitational constant from the given data. Mass of the Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, Radius of the Earth = 6400 km and the acceleration due to gravity on the surface = 9.8 m/s2
Solution:
Given: M = 6 × 1024 kg,
R = 6400km = 6.4 × 106 m,
g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Gravitational constant (G)
Formula. g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
G = \(\frac{\mathrm{gR}^{2}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
G = \(\frac{9.8 \times\left(6.4 \times 10^{6}\right)^{2}}{6 \times 10^{24}}=\frac{401.4 \times 10^{12}}{6 \times 10^{24}}\)
∴ G = 6.69 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
The value of gravitational constant is 6.69 × 10-11 N m2/kg2.

Question 11.
A body weighs 5.6 kg wt on the surface of the Earth. How much will be its weight on a planet whose mass is 1/7 times the mass of the Earth and radius twice that of the Earth’s radius.
Solution:
Given: WE = 5.6 kg-wt.,
\(\frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{E}}}=\frac{1}{7}, \frac{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}}\) = 2
To find: Weight of the body on the surface of planet (Wp)
Formula: W = mg = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 2
Weight of the body on the surface of a planet will be 0.2 kg-wt.
[Note: The answer given above is calculated in accordance with textual method considering the given data].

Question 12.
What is the gravitational potential due to the Earth at a point which is at a height of 2RE above the surface of the Earth, Mass of the Earth is 6 × 1024 kg, radius of the Earth = 6400 km and G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2 kg-2.
Solution:
Given: M = 6 × 1024 kg,
RE = 6400km = 6.4 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2,
h = 2RE
To find: Gravitational potential (V)
Formula: V = – \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation 11
= -2.08 × 107 J kg-1
Negative sign indicates the attractive nature of gravitational potential.
Gravitational potential due to Earth will be 2.08 × 107 J kg-1 towards the centre of the Earth.
[Note: According lo definition of gravitational potential its SI unit is J/kg.]

11th Physics Digest Chapter 5 Gravitation Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall? (Textbook Page No. 78)

Question 1.
i) What are Kepler’s laws?
ii)What is the shape of the orbits of planets?
Answer:

  1. The Kepler’s laws are:
    • Kepler’s first law: The orbit of a planet is an ellipse with the Sun at one of the foci.
    • Kepler’s second law: The line joining the planet and the Sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.
    • Kepler’s third law: The square of orbital period of revolution of a planet around the Sun is directly proportional to the cube of the mean distance of the planet from the Sun.
  2. The orbits of the planet are elliptical in shape.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Solutions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 2.
When released from certain height why do objects tend to fall vertically downwards?
Answer:
When released from certain height, objects tend to fall vertically downwards because of the gravitational force exerted by the Earth.

11th Std Physics Questions And Answers: